Home

Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 Stereo Equalizer User Manual

1. HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN German Branch Wiener Stra e 89 99 Paola Hill Ul Zhambyla 28 Gothaer Stra e 8 AT 2500 Baden Malta Paola PLA 1702 KAZ 100017 Karaganda D 40880 Ratingen Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Phone 7 7212 50 10 00 Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 Fax 7 7212 50 1150 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V orgsl CZECH REP Oktyabrskaya 19 Off 705 bld Traian 23 1 Czech Branch BY 220030 Minsk MD 2060 Kishinev Avenir Business Park Radlick 714 113a Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES CZ 158 00 Praha 5 Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 CST Eci Phone 420 251 551 470 ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOMATECHNIEKB V NETHERLANDS 33 Al lt aad Al Alee St Fax 420 251 551 471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 EG Sarayat Maadi Cairo MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V FRANCE BE 1831 Diegem NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 20 0 2 235 98 548 French Branch Phone 32 0 2 717 64 30 Phone 31 0 180 4
2. USB mouse keyboard USB mouse keyboard setting Use USB mouse OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP ja lt SS lt 1 Q 7 a Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard E USB mouse keyboard setting operation 7 Touse the USB mouse touch the setting item of USB mouse keyboard setting z Use USB mouse Use USE mouse The setting content is changed by touching Interlock with muse NO YES lt NO cursor touch operation 1 Ta Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard Continued to next page 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 15 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 16 USB mouse Use USB mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard E Interlock with mouse NO N oard setting x Use USB mouse Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type dS Japanese 106 keyboard Use USB mouse Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese 106 e 2 To move the mouse cursor to the touched position touch the setting item of Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation The setting content is changed by touching YES NO T
3. RDA RDB SDA SDB SG y a 57 2 25 p 65 2 56 il Za p io ioe 5 00 CO CO 1 C lt 0 y Unit mm inch E External dimensions of connector conversion adapter gt MITSUBISHI GT10 9PTSS 48 1 89 CE Unit mm inch App 2 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions E External dimensions of RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter MITSUBISHI ct14 Rs2T4 9P 48 1 89 ON OFF 36 1 42 17 0 67 il i Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 3 APPENDICES E External dimensions of communication cable GT01 C30R4 25P Unit mm inch 16 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 16 5 63 i ar 0 635 o ui a 7 y Pie i 7 0 28 E aly E
4. COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designer3 For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting GOT Environmental Setting Language Switching GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 5 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following four types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from GT Designer3 to the built in flash memory of the GOT 1 When project data is undownloaded A
5. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 11 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Setting operation of utility call key Menu call key 7 Touch or displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen The button repeats with every touch Set the corner to be set to a key position to For the key position 0 or 1 point only can be set Pressing time is effective OK only in case one point Menu call key 2 When setting 1 point specify the time to switch to the utility in case of keeping pressing the key position Touch the time input area 3 Touching the input area displays a keyboard Input numerical value from the keyboard Please select keys E 56 7 89 Del jal OL 142 3 4 Cancel E 4 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the Operation screen 1 2 3 11 12 When the utility call key is set to the zero point Even when the utility call key is set to the zero point you can display the main menu using either of the following two operations e Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen Keeping pressing the upper left corner while the Booting message is displayed after powering up gt 9 3 1
6. l The GOT can display the screen for debugging and self checking The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking functions Item Description Reference z 20 Debug System monitor A list editor FX list editor Backup restoration 14 1 Z Z EWE Self check Memory check Display check Touch panel check I O check Ethernet status check 14 3 S w S BS System alarm display GOT error CPU error 14 19 2 E z oz GOT start time GOT start time 14 21 N oO zZ z 14 1 Deb 255 z gt ebug dh ar ae ato 5 aot In this manual the overview of the debugging function is described POS For display contents and operation procedure of debugging refer to the following manual L gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 aa i P j s ase The following describes the functions available as the debugging function Zee 83 Item Description Reference 2 z 2 WSE System monitor The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be monitored or tested 14 1 4 th D Cee A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited 14 1 SHE FX list editor The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited 14 1 lt Backup restoration Data can be backed up restored from the controller to GOT or backup data can be deleted 14 2 z a Z oe lt 8 BES ae gt E 14 1 1 System monitor y z LOO A System monitor allows monitoring and changing the devices in
7. Connect to the PLC RS 485 cable 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit The following serial multi drop connection unit is applicable Model name Description GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection 8 9 3 Installation E Installed with DIN rail Install the serial multi drop connection unit with its hook 1 place using the DIN rail e Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm Install the DIN rail with screws at intervals of 150mm E Directly installed to panel Install the serial multi drop connection unit to the panel using 4 5mm holes 2 places 8 12 8 OPTION 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 4 Parts name 1 a Protective cover is installed MITSUBISHI GT01 RS4 M RS 232 O POWER ORD Osp ERROR 90 3 55 72 2 84 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG Protective cover is removed GTO1 RS4 M RDA RDB SDA 9 Unit mm inch Description Installation hole 2 4 5 Lit in green when the power is properly supplied Lit in green when the data is being sent to PLC Lit in green when the data is being received from PLC No Name 1 Instal
8. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 9 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Security level change operation 1 Password input operation 7 By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input 2 When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again 3 After inputting password touch the Enter key When the password matches a message notifying successful change of the security level is displayed When the password does not match an error message is displayed Security level change success 4 Touching OK button returns the screen to the password input screen again Password error 5 Touching x button returns the screen to the security setting screen About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 11 10 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting Zz O E Utility call key setting function S The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified ra For the key position 0 or 1 poin
9. Load record GOT PLC Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 13 47 i Save record PLC Advanced recipe GOT record list screen lt E lt Q 2 T ua 0 fe a S Sa Q fe S m Ss lt L EAT ye OSE m eA mkoko LOO The device of controller is saved in selected record 13 48 Match records GOT gt PLC Selected record is verified to the device value of controller 13 49 Delete Device Value The device value contained in selected record is deleted 13 50 DEBUG AND SELF GOT SELF CHECK CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 33 13 2 Various Data Control E Display operation of Advanced Recipe information Main menu Program data control CLF 9 3 Utility Display fain Menu ProgramData contro munication sett ins Ta OS information GOT setup a Alarm information Time setting amp display Tan Project information ta i AQ infornat ion Program datagontral ga Debug amp self c Touch Program data control Advanced Recipe information Advanced Recipe information Advanced Recipe Information A Built in lt D nternal SRAM 13 34 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Advanced Recipe information 1 Advanced recipe information scre
10. 2 164 6 46 k 22 lt 120 4 73 pa 0 87 t 23 0 91 x S y F N A sisia A 4 40UNC Inch screw type K M2 6 mM S j gl RY Metric screw type a m S o CO 7 Q I lt J Y ie 22 120 4 73 oF 0 87 Panel thickness S 2mm 4mm 0 08 0 16 or less ars y 0000000000000000000 ans E earl S Sai Rah ala oO erect as I TL L 152 5 99 Unit mm inch E External dimensions of stand For angle of 75 5 m _ a jN SiS a S x uw N Hl y lt _153 6 03 p 260 10 24 ol 220 8 67 Unit mm inch APPENDICES App 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES E External dimensions of serial multi drop connection unit Protective cover is installed Protective cover is removed A A GT01 RS4 M MITSUBISHI GTO1 RS4 M O rower RS 232 R5 232 O rower Oro sD O ERROR so L O ERROR 90 3 55 72 2 84
11. BILTxT Del Rename Number Item Description 1 Select drive The target drive can be selected Even if SD card is not installed this message appears 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc lt _ 13 2 6 mlLogging information operation 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 8 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files 1 About the displayed file The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information screen 2 Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following L gt 13 1 4 Display file 13 54 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Logging information operation 1 Display operation of logging information 7 Touching a drive
12. Memory board Panel mounted USB port extension GT10 50FMB GT10 C10EXUSB 5S GT14 C10EXUSB 4S E Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description Abbreviation of the SWODNC GTWK3 E and SWOIDNC GTWK3 EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator GX Works2 GX Simulator2 GX Simulator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWOIDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Abbreviation of SWODNC GXW2 E and SWODNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller engineering software Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function Abbreviation of SWOID5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SWOD5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software pa
13. POINT Checking the available memory of storage location When saving resource data check available memory of storage location before use Memory capacity of internal SRAM D drive is 512kbytes Use the built in SD card A drive if the available memory is not enough 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 2 OS version confirmation Zz O Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and Standard monitor OS 5 When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 2 1 When install BootOS E When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving 5 message to cancel the installation so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed A Depending on the Installation method the dialog box to be displayed varies of e When installing from the built in SD card the dialog box is displayed by the main unit ES e When installing from GT Designer3 via USB or Ethernet the dialog box is displayed by the GT Designer3 FE 2 When install Standard monitor OS communication driver Option OS TE When Standard monitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version a information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will b
14. Panel thickness 2 to 4mm m 0 08 to 0 16inch 2 a Bs a8 e2 Nut Waterproof p 19 4 0 1 0 77 0 01 Unit mm inch Panel Cutting Dimensions The panel thickness is 2 0 to 4 0mm e For panel mounted USB port extension the panel surface with waterproof cap is compatible with IP67f Tightening torque of nut is 0 294 to 0 343Nem Overtightening or undertightening may disable the waterproof effect Tighten the waterproof cap properly when the cable is not used 8 14 8 OPTION 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension E Precautions on installing the panel mounted USB port extension 1 2 3 4 5 6 Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and panel mounted USB port extensions so that they do not cross each other Install the panel mounted USB port extension away from noise sources such as equipment Do not twist bend at a sharp angle or a right angle and stretch the panel mounted USB port extension since the cable may be broken Install it while considering the following control panel inside dimensions e Dimension between the back of the GOT and structures 80 3 15 or more E230 e e Dimension of the protruding cable TF N O Insert the USB plug part of the tip of the panel mounted USB port extension secure
15. Product Cable Model name Contents name length GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product Model name are Contents name length GT09 C30R40301 6T 3am GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R40302 6T GT09 C100R40302 6T GT09 C200R40302 6T GT09 C300R40302 6T RS 422 cable GT09 C30R40303 6T GT09 C100R40303 6T GT09 C200R40303 6T GT09 C300R40303 6T For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller GT09 C30R40304 6T GT09 C100R40304 6T GT09 C200R40304 6T GT09 C300R40304 6T GT09 C30R20301 9P For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9pin conversion cable RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20302 9P For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R20304 9S For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold sepa
16. 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 15 14 2 Self Check UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL L oad D 79 a Zz oO faa w a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 2 After selecting Self the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback RS232 communication check Error connector When the GOT cannot receive the data The following cause during the data transmission the dialog box shown Connection error H W error left appears and the GOT restarts in five seconds parameter i e When the dialog box shown left appears check the na following e Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted e Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT utility L gt 10 1 3 Communication setting contents e Check if the hardware has no problems L gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 During check the dialog box shown left is displayed RS232 communication check Executing now 4 When the all checks ended normally the dialog box shown left is displayed And the GOT restarts in five seconds RS232 communicati
17. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10 1 4 Communication setting operation 10 4 Channel Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel Driver assign The example of changing to the direct CPU connection Communication driver A QnA L QCPU LJ71C24 QJ71C24 for the GOT of the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 is used Before starting operation After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety 7 Install communication driver A QnA L QCPU L Communication Setting Standard I F Setting QJ71C24 to GOT ChNo RS422 485 5 7 1 AJ710024 MELDAS C6 Download of Communication Setting from drawing Cho a software is not required Hi i After installing communication driver touch the Chio Ethernet Channel Driver assign button in Communication jane 2 Definition of ChNo Setting O None 1 2 FA device S External device 9 PC connection Ben ip StHDrivagassien OK 4 2 Touch the Change assignment button on the ERRE displayed screen as shown left 1 AJ710
18. 1241 Time setting and Display lt c4 cites cartes eile a a el Gea elt 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display fUNCtIONS eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaas 12 1 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 Data Storage LOGAN ON i c ccscacafisacciandes see haeeedhscecceebaaasadeeg ge atahady ptateaateaassedden es staedtyanuates headed 13 1 13 1 1 Data type and storage location resorin eaii eee aiaa r EEEE Ea E ARE AEREE ERR Ta 13 1 13 1 2 OS version CONFIPMALION soi asera aa a e EKE OEREIN ERA TAEAO E 13 3 13 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location eeeeeeeessereeeeeenaes 13 4 Tot Display Tile sien feck EE EAE earliest ALA tp eee ee nee pene 13 4 13 2 Various Data Control s tc E eE A A OER EO Ate 13 5 T2 sOSHMfOnmation a r T E E Gave ieee persia eid etetiee ages 13 5 toaz JAAP INTOMMAUON ee e EEE EEEE E EE TEE EEE EER 13 11 TIZAS Project Information sc tenes easiest hace Nina nae eee ne ec 13 17 13 2 4 Hard copy information cc ccccceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeneeaees 13 27 13 2 5 Advanced recipe information ccceceeceeececeecaeceeeeeeeeeeeccaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecececeesaeeseeeeeess 13 33 T326 LOGGING INFOMMALON osea E A AE N 13 53 TOAT Memory card format 2 c h acct a E r R E RE 13 63 13 2 8 Memory imormnmato l eara E E E E O 13 65 13 2 9 USB device status
19. Executing now Internal Flush memory area write read check Normaly completed 2 When error is found in memory When error is found by memory check the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is ere displayed write read error In case of error contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Touching OK returns to the Memory check screen 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 5 14 2 Self Check 14 2 2 Drawing check E Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens E Display operation of drawing check Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check LF 9 3 Utility Display a ion settin a Time setting amp display a E Progran data control Debus AQ Self check Display check Debug amp Self check D Drawing check aoi check T abort switch continue s Drawing che POINTE Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases e There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in 35 gt 14 2 2 m Display operation of drawing check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 14 6 14 GO
20. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User s Manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the panel tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short or malfunction Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect Never drop cutting chips and electric wire chips into the ventilation window of the GOT when you drill screw holes or perform wiring Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused When inserting removing a SD card into from the GOT turn the SD card access switch off in advance
21. Touching Copy button displays the message Please select a destination in the left bottom of the screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy 6 When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 16 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 3 Project Information z O ri E E Function of project information O The project data files stored in each drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory E USB memory can be displayed rd by lists E In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc E Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 18 13 19 T Delete Deletes project data 13 19 eS F Copy Copies project data can copy the A drive and E drive 13 20 E 2 SOS Property display Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Designer3 13 21 2 Q z r Data check Data ch
22. 2 E E o S E zi 8 og lt M26 F eres e o GT01 COOOR4 25P 16 50 1 97 L 53 2 09 16 0 63 0634 o7 eee 0 28 a a 5 EP 8 lt M26 M2 6 A Value of O00 Length L mm inch 100 10000 200 20000 300 30000 GT01 COOOIR4 8P 50 1 97 L Je 4001 58 1 i 25x33 0 52 g E 6 0 99 1 3 3 EN Hig E dis d 26 Value of 000 Length L mm inch 10 1000 30 3000 100 10000 200 20000 300 30000 App 4 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions GT01 C30R2 25P 1 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 16 0 65 ney fol z 3 i n lt 4 40NC E E M2 6 gt Lo GT01 C30R2 9S 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 Je 5001 97 TH e 9 BO 3E C E E 0 ee 4 40 4 40UNC gt h GT01 C30R2 6P 16 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 Je 4001 58 1 a 20x28 0 52 9 7 0 79 1 11 fe 0 28 L_J000t0 f Is Lo i lt 4 40UNC APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions 35 1 38 App 5 App 6 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function a Z lt The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type 8 z i g K A zZ Moreover there are the functi
23. 2 When the GOT is added to the network in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists The GOT goes into offline status and displays the following dialog box IPY FLAPEBELTWHET IES F LEAF L AEIR PLARBRELT CEE The IP address is dupulicated Remove the communication cable and specify the IP address again after rebooting the GOT IPES TRIS INAS Aine eine PiE IP Address 192 168 0 181 MAC Address 08 00 70 33 C0 60 Clear IP Address Reboot GOT e When changing the IP address of another device which has the same IP address as that of the GOT After changing the IP address of another device which has the same address as that of the GOT touch the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT e When changing the IP address of the GOT Touch the Clear IP Address button to clear the IP address of the GOT After touching the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT change the IP address of the GOT using the Utility 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 21 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs z O H S Z LZ gt a E 2a ae ag Eos Sus a2 z SEG B20 7 0 z F n zZ O lt 9 a Wi a e T fe Lu N DISPLAY AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION
24. 6 4 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 Installation Procedure Cautions on installation 1 2 Tightening the mounting screw Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop and disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening may damage the unit or distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the display area leading to deterioration of the visibility or incorrect input from the touch panel Also overtightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect e Specified torque range 0 3 to 0 5N m Mounting panel face Make sure that the panel surface is free from warpage flaws and irregularities Warpage flaws and irregularities may disable the waterproof effect Select proper panel thickness under consideration of the panel strength For example the panel strength may be insufficient depending on the panel material and dimensions even if the panel thickness is acceptable Insufficient panel strength may cause warpage depending on the installation positions of the GOT and other equipment 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 6 5 Installation Procedure UL cUL SYSTEM STANDARDS AND p EMC DIRECTIVE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME Zz O lt i z z Ee 2 zZ WIRING OPTION 6 INSTALLATION 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING Lu WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANG ER Be s
25. 79 GT09 C30R4 6C 3m 5 i i GT09 C100R4 6C 10m z computer linkiconnection For connecting GOT to computer link module serial communication unit O cable GT09 C200R4 6C 20m 5 Ww GT09 C300R4 6C 30m fA CPU direct ti E reer connection ST01 C30R2 6P 3m For connecting GOT to QCPU FX expansion board connection FX ost GT01 C30R2 98 3m For connecting GOT to FXCPU expansion board D Sub Spin w RS 232 adaptor connection data For connecting GOT to FXCPU special adaptor D Sub 9pin transfer cable z cable o FX special adapto a pea apa GT01 C30R2 25P 3m For connecting GOT to FXCPU special adaptor D Sub 25pin lt connection a Computer link connection GT09 C30R2 9P 3m fo For connecting GOT to computer link module serial communication unit cable GT09 C30R2 25P 3m Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product Cable 5 Model name Contents name length GT09 C30R40101 9P m STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL GT09 C100R40101 9P 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication unit serial communication GT09 C200R40101 9P 20m board GT09 C300R40101 9P 30m Zz RS 422 cable O GT09 C30R40103 5T 3m B GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m z For connecting GOT to serial communication board z GT09 C200R40103 5T 20m Z GT09 C300R40103 5T 30m GT09 C30R40102 9P 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P 10m RS 422 cable For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit communication board GT09 C200R40102 9P 20m
26. Clock setting os om os Adjust Broadcast Adjust Broadcast None 06716 2011 15 54 59 TUE GOT internal battery None Low voltage status 2 Touching OK button reflects the setup contents Touching the x button restarts the GOT After restarting the GOT operates with the changed setting 1 2 3 When connecting with an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for Clock setting while the GOT is connected with external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted For the list of PLC installed with clock function refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 Setting of clock setting and battery When selecting Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with connecting a battery to the GOT Operation setting by GT Designer3 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 Time Setting and Display 2 Clock display Carry out the display and setting of GO
27. DOLOLCLLOLCOGLOOOGLOLL IE 8069 OEOSS368 CECH COSS 5 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL d The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed L PS d D 79 a Zz oO faa Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 9 14 2 Self Check 14 2 3 Font check E Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the u pper left part of the screen one by one E Display operation of Font check Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check lt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu x Jebug amp selt check Self chec munication settin mory check GOT setup Self checi Displavggheck Time setting amp display si s al eck Progran data control z check Fy Debus IQRE chec Self check Display check Debug amp Self check Font check Display check Drawing check D T labort switch continue switch T Font check Font che Notel In amount 1 14 10 Notes on Font Check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic characters etc 0x0000 to 0x04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill e Hangul characters 0OxAC0O0 to 0xD7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary e Kanji 0x4E00 to Ox9FA5 CJK integrat
28. ES ow OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 2 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration For information of the EMC Directive compliant models please consult with your nearest Mitsubishi product provider E GOT Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate When using a GOT other than shown below the system does not conform to the EMC Directive Item Hardware version of the GOT GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 Q Version C or later GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE Version C or later GT1450 Q Checking method of hard ware version Confirm the hardware version with the rating plate of the GOT MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL modEL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX SIN 11Y0086 8G I B Q MAC ADD 002692621123 oY MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION Hardware MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26001C version E Connection method Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Connection method GT14 Direct connection to CPU O Computer link connection x CC Link connection via G4 x Ethernet connection O GOT multi drop connection x Other connections om q When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by other company create the
29. Function setting Operator name password Auth method Automatic logout time 0 min 1 60 0 invalid Password expiration date 0 day 1 1000 0 always Ext auth ID Initial position input Valid byte count input 0 Byte 0 1998 2 Byte 2 16 OK Cance Automatic logout time edit Input automatic logout time x X 1 Touch Function setting in the operator setting menu and then the Admin password authentication dialog box is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Function setting screen in displayed Touch an item to be set a Automatic logout time b Auth method c Password expiration date d Initial position input e Valid byte count input a Touch Automatic logout time and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed Input the time When the input is completed touch the Enter key Authentication method Switch the authentication method Touch the item to switch the display between Operator name password External auth general Fingerprint auth gt Operator name password 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13
30. N stem alarm disp ees oae GOT error i au Touching Reset resets the TO Karrine Built in battery voltage is lw system alarm display in the 11 57 21 GOT error CPU error FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL No Error L oad TT 79 a Zz oO 5 faa Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 19 14 3 System Alarm Display Operation of system alarm display 1 System alarm display resetting em alarm disp xX GOT error Reset 500 Karning Built in battery voltage is low 11 57 21 CPU error No Error System alarm disp x GOT error Reset 500 Karnirg Built in battery voltage is Tow 11 57 21 CPU error No Error 14 20 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System alarm screen L gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING A method for resetting system alarm depends on an error GOT error Touch Reset button to reset system alarms CPU error and Network error The system alarm is automatically reset after its cause is eliminated 1 Before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error Eliminate the system alarm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GO
31. SD card is faulty Replace memory media Replace the SD card Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination SD card or USB memory 337 File output failed e Folder storing data 7 Confirm output file path e Write protect file Delete the above folder or file or change the name of the file to be created Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 340 Printer error or power failure e 1 Confirm the printer x e 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on 341 Printer error e 1 Confirm the printer x e 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is being 345 BCD BIN conversion error displayed input O Correct data Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value e Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 351 Recipe file error Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the SD card or USB memory x Confirm content of recipe file e Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the SD card or USB memory format Recipe file make error Failed to generate recipe file 352 Reboot GOT after inserting x Reboot the GOT after installing the SD card or USB memory memory card E Failed to write in the recipe file Unable to write Recipe fil
32. STP 2 4 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo amplifier i CNC MODBUS R RTU or MODBUS R TCP connection 2 Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used i z ES 2 5 2 3 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product lt Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives E Power and ground wires wiring method 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 or similar within the range shown below Q Zw lt gt okr T lt X ra 29A ae E2 N WwW Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in 5 2 1 E Control panel 2 Be sure to ground the FG cable and protective ground cable 6 z A avoc 3 T Pt A Z Up to 75mm x Zz fe H oO 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 5 5 2 EMC Directive Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cable
33. Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed 10 Changing security levels S o tting the utility call keys 11 2 4 11 2 5 Adjusting the touch panel 11 2 6 Setting the USB mouse and keyboard Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA transparent function Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data Trigger backup settings Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO 11 2 7 Behavior of duplicate IPs Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards Time setting amp display Program data control OS information Alarm information Selecting a base clock Displaying the clock current time Setting the clock current time Displaying the battery status Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking OS data Deleting and copying alarm log files Converting alarm log files in G1A format gt CSV or TXT format 12 13 2 1 13 2 2 Project information Downloading uploading deleting or copying project files displaying project file property checking project file data 13 2 3 Hard copy information Advanced Recipe information Logging information Memory card format Memory information Deleting or copying h
34. lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z Ss a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO d Undo operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one 1 Touch the Undo button Operator information management OperatorName ID Level Update Administrator m py OP0001 1001 10 2012 07 22 i oP00O2 1002 12 2012 07 22 oP0003 1003 12 2012 07 22 id Add Edit Delete Undo Drive mef A Import Export Save 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed and then Do you want to discard the unsaved touch the OK button operator information and restore the data to the state before editing X 3 The Admin password authentication screen is Admin password authentication Enter the administrator password displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with Password Oo touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 When the administrator password is correctly input OperatorName ID Level Update the current operator information is restored to the Administrator t 0P0001 1001 10 2012 07 22 previgus sav dione 0P0002 1002 12 2012 07 22 0P0003 1003 12 2012 07 22 OP0005 1005 15 2012 07 22 Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save 13 82 13 FILE DI
35. the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the SD card while the Processing message is on the screen after SD card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the logging is executed while the GOT is in access to other files SD card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the logging after the processing for other files is completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of the logging folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 7 Memory card format E Function of the memory card format Format the SD card USB memory Internal SRAM E Display operation of Memory card Format Main menu Program Data control L7 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Program datagontrol Memory card Format Touch Program data control Move to Memory card format Memory card Format Memory card format Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 63 13 2 Various Data Control E Memory card format operation Memory card format Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM Caution If execute format ope
36. 01 Product ia Model name Specifications name GT1455 QTBDE 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal display aces colors 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery built in Ethernet interface GT1455 QTBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal display 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery GOT GT1450 QLBDE 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid cystal display monochrome black white 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery built in Ethernet interface GT1450 QLBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal display monochrome black white 24VDC memory size 9MB built in battery 2 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment 2 2 2 Option Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs Sold separately Cable i Product name Model name Contents 5 length x W GT01 C10R4 8P 1m 5 A GT01 C30R4 8P 3m 3 A EREE To For connecting GOT to FXCPU MINI DIN 8pin 5 pa For connecting GOT to FXCPU expansion board MINI DIN 8pin board connection cable T zZ GT01 C200R4 8P 20m e GT01 C300R4 8P 30m 20 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m EE im RS 422 QnA A FXCPU direct For connecting GOT to QnA A Motion controller CPU A series FXCPU D Y 5 cable connection cable GT01 C100R4 25P 10m Sub 25pin me computer link connection GT01 C200R4 25P 20m For connecting GOT to FA CNVLJICBL cable For connecting GOT to serial communication unit AJ71QC24 N R4 GT01 C300R4 25P 30m
37. 12 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 18 2 2 List of error message system alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below is Ermes e a Error message Action code storage Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen 303 Set monitor points too large For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following Decrease setting points i GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The number of objects using Sampling Cycle during ON Cycle during Set trigger points too large 304 OFF exceeds 100 x Decrease setting points Decrease the number of objects 306 No project data The project data is not downloaded or the screen data is not sufficient x Download screen data Download the project data or screen data N The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set f j X Set the monitor device of the object 308 No comment data The comment file does not exist Download comment Create the comment file and download to GOT 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device Correct device Correct the device s e Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project 310 Project data does not exist or out data x of range e Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen No
38. 16 11 11 17 12dot Font Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 407K GIOSMONT G1D 06 16 11 11 17 System Screen Information Basic 05 27 61 KIF Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file When data is normal Data normal When data is erroneous Data error Touching Property button after selecting the property displaying target folder displays the Property screen shown left In the Property screen the following information is displayed for each file selected by J Item Description Name Displays the file name Size Displays the file size Displays the following items according to the kind of the files Boot BootOS Kind Basic Standard monitor OS Extend Extend function OS Option Optional function OS Comm Communication driver Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS Date Time Displays the date and time of the file creation Touching A button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching x button returns the screen to the previous screen display Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 2 Alarm informa
39. 2 Various Data Control c Touch Password expiration date and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is ration date edit displayed Input the expiration date When the input is completed touch the Enter key d Initial position input lt p ACA Set the initial position input byte count of DEDEGE EE 410 in extemal authentication device SSS Searle e Pore aY input l tti i t t xt TEATRET authentication ID amg Only available when the external authentication general is set as the authentication method 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input The function setting editing process and then the dialog box shown left is displayed is completed i aye and the input setting is saved Touch the Cancel button or the X button and If you close the screen before then the dialog box shown left is displayed pressing 0K button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed lt lt x a x in 0 e iva a a 0 D aj O Zz e Oo FILE DISPLAY AND 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 89 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition xi GOT s 0S project data are copied to the SD card This SD card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in SD card Cop
40. 5 Utility Call Key Setting E Key sensitivity setting Operation 1 Touching the setting items displays the keyboard Buzzer volume SHORT Enter the numerical value from the keyboard Window move buzzer ON T Security setting Setting 2 The key response speed 1 corresponding to the Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity setting is displayed Key sensitivity Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m 3 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touch panel calibration Setting Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 4 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Quick response Slow response 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Standard E Touch panel calibration For touch panel calibration operation refer to the following Key sensitivity setting Key reaction speed 120ms L gt 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration E USB mouse keyboard setting For the USB mouse keyboard setting refer to the following L gt 11 2 7 USB mouse k
41. 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S type connector conversion adapter enables an easy crossover wiring for the multi drop connected GOTs For the wiring between the connector conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 8 8 1 Applicable connector conversion adapter The following connector conversion adapter is applicable Model name Description GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection 8 8 2 Installing procedure of connector conversion adapter Turn the GOT power off 2 Connect the connection conversion adapter to the RS 422 485 interface on the GOT 3 Fix the connection conversion adapter to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 8 OPTION 8 11 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit GOT serial multi drop connection is a communication method for 1 N communication by connecting multiple GOTs to one PLC using the GT01 RS4 M serial multi drop connection unit For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Serial multi drop connection unit S SE C ere
42. Are n faint Refers to information useful for operation When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference Lo Indicates the location of related content lt gt 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the SD card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in SD card A drive memory check install the SD card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the opor ogaraiong EEEO O Indicates the operation procedure Laaa A aro eek onl aan RGR Perform procedures in numerical order A Built in SD card ed Indicates the setting items displayed Re on the software and GOT screen Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen or a key of the computer keyboard Internal SRAM Check Touching Check button displays the dialog box on Internal Flush memory area the left wr ite read check Selecting OK button displays the numeric keyboard window Selecting Cancel button retums to the in
43. CONTROL 13 27 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Hardcopy information Hard copy information Hard copy information A C D Built in SD card Flash Memory Internal SRAM Number 1 Item Select drive Hard copy information Storage file folder display screen Hard copy information A PROJECT 1 odene Size Date Tine KJp6 28 11 14 rh 280KB 3862528KB WW QFile Del Copy Rename 5 Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected When SD card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed SD card A Built in SD card e USB memory E USB drive Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder 2 Kind 2 In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc lt 13 2 4 mHardcopy information operation 3 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 8 The size of drive Operation switch Displa
44. Communication Detail setting The contents of communication detail setting varies according to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail setting of the drawing software For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E Communication detail setting of host modem On the communication detail setting screen of host modem the communication setting between the GOT and the modem and the modem operation can be executed Detail setting PC connection type Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit 8 BIT Stop Bit 1 J BIT Par ity Odd Init AT command ATRFEORCORKORDOWESO Modem operation Init Disc OK Item Description Setting range Host PC Host Modem PC connection type Select the connection method to the PC lt Default Host PC gt 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed when communicating lt Default 115200 gt Data Bit Set the data bit when communicating 7bit 8bit lt Default 8bit gt Stop Bit Set the stop bit length when communicating 1bit 2bit lt Default 1bit gt Set whether to execute or not the parity check during Odd Even None lt Default Odd gt communication When executing set the type of the parity check i i vo Parity Init AT command Set the AT command for initialize the modem lt D
45. Daily Inspection screws Connection Proximate status solderless No alarm displayed L 3 gt 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 17 2 Remove clean Retighten terminal screws Correct Retighten connector fixing screws Replace with new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span even if battery voltage is not displayed 17 3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN Q zZ a 6 r Z6 ab Zo ep 2 Clean MITSUBISHI Goticoo TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 3 17 3 Cleaning Method 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery 17 4 Replacement Low battery voltage detection and replacement Battery contains the data for notifying the maintenance timing and current time It is recommended that you replace batt
46. Display operation of main menu Precautions on using the advanced alarm popup display When Display Position Switching is set to Switch in the advanced alarm popup display setting set either of the following for the utility call key Setting the position of the utility call key to the upper right or lower left corner e Setting Pressing Time of the utility call key to 1 or more seconds When Pressing Time is set to 0 and the key position is set to the lower left corner the operation is as described below If the positions of the key and the advanced alarm popup display overlap the utility screen appears by switching the display position of the advanced alarm popup display For the advanced alarm popup display refer to the following lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the GT Designer3 If a user tries to display the main menu of the utility the password input screen is displayed For details on setting passwords refer to the following L GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration Zz o E Touch panel calibration settin
47. File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed 7 Touch and select the file to change the name e Information KindName Size O DIRI G1P JARPOOO1 1K 16KB 386 1584KB 1File 2 Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed LINE A_RECIP A Z English capital AO S Jaj 0 9 Numeric Symbol LIXICIVIBININ Enter 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box Before ARPO001 G1P SNOWMEN After LINE A_RECIPE G1P 4 Change filename Touching OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Process completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 43 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt Q Ed K 0 e x a a 0 O o Z 3 a ae naO OFF wiz exe LOO 13 44 8 Folder create operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created Advanced Recipe Information pts aoo P lireooo 1 is ae 3861584KB RECIPES AZO _ _ AC DEL LIXICIVIBININ Enter Create new folder Process completed Touch the Create Folder button 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button inpu
48. GOT 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT All the OS and project data stored in the SD card or USB memory are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT This installing method is effective in the following cases e The GOT utility cannot be displayed e The standard monitor OS is not installed 2 Installing using the data control function Utility C gt 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility By operating the utility select OS or project data stored in the SD card or USB memory and transfer them to the GOT Precautions on installing BootOS standard monitor OS 1 Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation install standard monitor OS When installing BootOS the built in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it 2 Copying project data using SD card or USB memory After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created 3 When OS and project data are in the SD card or USB memory when using GT Designer3 When installing by pressing the upper left corner of the GOT screen project
49. GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility the main menu must be displayed first Main Menu Main Menu 5 5 A F Communication setting ir GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check Language 2 Language 1 Main menu The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu displays the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms Touching the Language button displays the Select Language screen Select Language x HAR gt English eran Deutsch x 1 Touch the button of a desired language and then OK button and the language is selected 2 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the language of the utility is switched to the selected one 9 4 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched The following screen is displayed Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one Zz Q iS D L
50. GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the SD card or USB memory and inherits the file system before formatting 13 64 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 8 Memory information Zz O E Memory information functions 5 Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size re Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a PC E E Display operation of Memory information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display E Qa Time setting amp display Z Q 5 Frogram data ntro k D g id F Fos ses a Memory informaton Program data control l zZ E a or Memory information Zz 5 Oo psu hemes le _____ x ago lash memory empty area size SER A Built in SD card 3861232 K byte H C Flash Memory Sa User area 9187 K byte FE OS area 4474 K byte ZRO fgz D Internal SRAM 505 K byte eran Boot drive empty area size gee oat 18583 K byte E Display example of Memory information lt E lt Q T K 0 0 o a a fe S m ve Ss lt x peel ye ase woZ mkoko LOO Memory information lash memory empty area size A Built in SD card k lt 3861232 K byte Om Flash Memory 5 o User area 9187 K byte ae OS area 4474 K byte Pag 9 ae OL O0 gt A Ow ae 26 ate 22 Description O
51. Japan e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 5 1 UL cUL Standards fay Zw lt gt oE F lt X Q Sn ATO ES o Wi OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive EMC Directives are those which require any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external Emission electromagnetic interference and It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external Immunity electromagnetic sensitivity Items E EMC directive thru E Grounding summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives E EMC directive The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below Applied standard Test standard Test details Standard value 30M 230MHz QP ENS5011 Electromagnetic emissions from the 30dB u V m 30m in measure
52. LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW Abbreviations and generic terms GT1665HS V GOT1000 GT1155HS Q Series Description Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Serial communication unit RS 422 conversion unit Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 GT15 75571LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 GT15 J71GP23 SX GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 z 3 CC Link interface unit GT11HS CCL GT11H CCL Interface converter unit Serial multi drop connection unit Connection Conversion Adapter GT15 751F900 GT01 RS4 M GT10 9PT5S RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set E Option unit A
53. Lu 235 GOT setup r im Time setting amp display z lt D Program datagontral A Ww 5 E oan amp sie 9 aoe Touch Program data control GOT data package acquisition z BS GOT data package acquisition 2 9 r m GOT data package acquisition _ SEA GOT s OS project data are copied to Fa the SD card This SD card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in SD card lt E lt Q T K 0 0 o a a fe S m ve Ss lt x eel ye ase woZ mkoko LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 73 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 12 Operator information management E Operator management 1 Operator management function The function enables displaying a list of the operator information and adding changing or deleting the operator information to be used A password for operator authentication can be changed when the password is out of date Functions for the operator authentication automatic logout time authentication method password expiration date etc can be set For details of operator authentication functions refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Operator ma
54. Manual for GT Works3 For the dimensional drawing of connection cables refer to the following L3 Appendix 1 External Dimensions STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL wl ES General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points INSTALLATION 1 Protecting against noise a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a highpower drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference WIRING 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 WIRING 7 1 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Connect the power supply to the power terminals on the back panel of the GOT Use 0 75mmZ or thicker cables to avoid voltage drop and tighten the terminal screw with the spe
55. O The following USB memory is applicable for GOT lt Model name Description a 3 eL Commercially available USB memory gt 6 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor a 6 z 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory g g When USB memory is accurately inserted to the USB interface the GOT automatically recognizes it 2 For removing methods of the USB memory refer to the following K7 13 2 9 USB device status display W lt Z e in lt ox STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING Zz 2 Q ie 8 OPTION 8 3 8 2 USB Memory 8 3 Battery The battery backs up clock data and data stored in the built in RAM D drive including alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area A battery is installed to GT14 when GT14 is shipped from the factory 8 3 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT14 Model name Description Battery for clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced alarm GT11 50BAT advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups 8 3 2 Battery specifications The following describes the battery specificatio
56. OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 13 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation E Touch panel calibration operation Touch the X point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting 7 Touch the center of the displayed on the upper left precisely Touch panel calibration 2 Touch the X point displayed on the upper right 3 Touch the X point displayed on the lower left Touch panel calibration ark to calibrate the touch panel 4 Touch the X point displayed on the lower right Touch panel calibration on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel points rmed pl 5 Touching the gt lt button displayed on the upper right returns the screen to the previous screen When the precise touch could not be made touch the Readjustment button to make the setting from Heili 3 again lf t touch 11 14 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting E Function of USB mouse keyboard To install and use the USB mouse keyboard on the GOT set the USB mouse keyboard E Display operation of USB mouse keyboard Main menu GOT setup Operation L gt 9 3 Utility Display GOT setup eration Buzzer vo lune Window move buzzer amp Security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity Key reaction speed Touch panel calibration Setting GOT setup Operation USB ngyse keyooard Setting
57. SD card interface with its front gt cn SD card side nameplate side outside gt front face y 3 Turn the SD card access switch on Fo After the SD card access switch is turned on the SD card can be used 8 OPTION 8 1 8 1 SD Card OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING Zz 2 Q E Removing 1 Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF Make sure that the SD card access LED turns off O q ACCESS OFF SD CARD When the SD card access LED turns off the SD card can be installed or removed even during the GOT power on 2 Push in the SD card once and leave your finger then remove the SD card Precautions for removing the SD card 1 While the SD card access LED is on do not install remove the SD card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the SD card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the SD card leading to failure or damage of the card 8 OPTION 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory The USB memory is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function For details refer to the following x K gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL z 8 2 1 Applicable USB memory Z
58. Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 00 08 8 12 SPECIFICATIONS renani anaia 3 1 General Specifications cceceeeseecereeeeees 3 1 Performance Specifications 000ccee 3 2 Power Supply Specifications ccceee 3 3 SRAM Comntrol 2 c eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeees 13 68 Stand eee cette a E ieee A 8 10 Standard monitor OS 00 cccceceeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeees 16 1 System Alarm seien dennaii 18 11 18 13 System Alarm Display 14 19 Index 1 INDEX SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration s s s 2 1 System Equipment ccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 System MONO essa 14 1 T Time Setting and Display 12 1 Clock dis play oio EAEE NE 12 3 O aao EU e EEEE EEE E E TET 12 2 Touch panel check cceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 14 12 Transparent Mode Setting 0 eeeeereeeeeees 11 17 Transportation Precautions ccceeeeeeeee App 9 TROUBLESHOOTING soosi ena i 18 1 U UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 USB device status display eecceeeeeeeeeees 13 66 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 9 USB MEMO ete a E EREET a 8 3 USB mouse keyboard setting c eee 11 15 Utility Call Key Setting 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 11 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1 App 7 DISPLAY AEA tls aan vate tend edeta ee 9 4 Function Listono ee 9 2 W Window move buzzer volume setting 11 6 11 8
59. Set the 5V power supply when using the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor lt gt 10 1 4 ll 5V power supply operation Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 2 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The following below is required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller 1 Installing communication drivers Up to 4 communication drivers 2 Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the communication interface 3 Downloading the contents project data assigned in 2 Perform1 2 3 by drawing software Standard VF Setting CH No Driver 1 F 1 AS422 485 1 M MELSEC FX Detail Setting WF 2 R5232 9 Host PC v 1 F 3 USB Hast PC v F 4 Ethemet 0 v None v For details refer to the following L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When Communication Setting has not been downloaded When Communication Setting has not been downloaded using drawing software make the communication settings in the drawing software or on the utility screen of the GOT 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 10 1 Communication setting UTILITY FUNCTION 2 QH Sez SFS ewe Eat Que z SmE 2a5 BES ozp OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY
60. Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 13 1 4 Display file The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility BootOS Item Standard monitor OS Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters 24 dot numerical HQ font 32 dot numerical HQ font TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Display screen OS information screen Storage destination Drive name folder name A drive C drive E drive G1BOOT 2 A drive C drive E drive G1SYS 2 Project data User created screen data Comment data 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic TrueType Mincho Gothic Project information screen A drive C drive E drive APROJECT1 2 4 Resource data 13 4 Advanced alarm log file CSV file gt Advanced alarm log file TXT file gt Advanced alarm log file binary file Alarm log file CSV file gt Hard copy file BMP file gt Hard copy file JPG file gt Advanced recipe file CSV file gt Advanced recipe file TXT file Advanced recipe file binary file gt Alarm information
61. WIRING ited mies elect fates nae 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 2 WIO INSID ierre e ae eh iis 7 5 Wiring outside ooo a a 7 5 Index 2 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number ab Revision Number Oct 2011 JY997D44801 First edition Jan 2012 JY997D44801 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 40S GT14 RS2T4 9P type RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor compatible Jan 2012 JY997D44801 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 40S UL cUL Standards supported Apr 2012 JY997D44801 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 45X The backup restoration setting function is added Jun 2012 JY997D44801 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 54G e Partial changes of general specifications frequency Connection of printer compatible e Ethernet status check compatible Company name changes from YAMATAKE to AZBIL from PANASONIC EW to PANASONIC Sep 2012 JY997D44801 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 58L Operator information management is added This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 1 Meee REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please c
62. Z Debug A list editor Sequence program and parameter change of ACPU 14 1 2 2 FX list editor Sequence program and parameter change of FX PLC 14 1 3 Z z Backup restoration Executing backups executing restorations and deleting backup data 14 1 4 E Memory check Memory check of A drive C drive D drive and E drive 14 2 1 Debug amp self check Drawing check 14 2 2 Display check Self Font check 14 2 3 g z check Touch panel check Touch panel operation check 14 2 4 2z p p p zez 6ES I O check Connected target confirmation self loopback check 14 2 5 D z GMW Ethernet status check Sends a ping to check the Ethernet connection status 14 2 6 3 z 2 zuz System alarm display Displaying GOT errors and CPU errors resetting GOT errors 14 3 Se S GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours 14 4 Clean Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display 15 o 0 4 Do not use this function for other than 5V power supply to the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor lt 37 7 11 RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter A Fh Q 2 5V power supply can be set with the GT 14 hardware version B or later In the hardware version A since 5V power is always Z 5 2 supplied this setting operation is invalid z 5 aa a eee 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL
63. and Customer keyword is selected The Customer Keyword can be registered after registration of the keyword 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with customer keyword refer to the manual of the PLC used GIAR GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK The customer keyword allows the user to clear the protection set by a keyword However the protection cannot be z deleted a lt fa 2z Zo jo mT On INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 11 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 2 When the registration is selected or the Regist key is touched on a PLC not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed in a pop up window When the keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for the registration the Customer Keyword entry screen of is displayed For the keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be set Keyword Please input keyword Registration conclition All Protect Setting Target PLC When keyword and 2nd keyword S M R PAn RS When only keyword is registered registered FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Registration conclition 2 can be selected Registration conclition 2 cannot be selected FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword q For d
64. be initialized and then touch the Initialize selected area button The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To initialize the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the initialization touch the Cancel button When touching the OK button in 7 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button starts the initialization Touching the Cancel button cancels the initialization The completion dialog box appears when the initialization is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 70 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 2 Operation to restore data SRAM contro Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date Time Pjfdvanced sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 jdvanced user alarm 1 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 25 0KB 475 0KB Backup restoration Drive 2 8NB 3 76B _A_ Al Created date 11 06 10 14 08 The above data will be restored After completion of restoration GOT will be rebooted Do you want to execute restoration will be rebooted Do you really want to execute 7 To restore data in the drive to the SRAM user area Select the drive where the data is stored and then touch the Restoration button The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To restore all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the restora
65. cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device POINT Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA MELSEC A series or MELSEC FX series please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device 5 4 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive E About the cable used Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables The GOT identified on the previous page are compliant with the EMC requirement when the following 2 communication cables are used Fe gt 1 Panel mounted USB port extension 2 GT14 C10EXUSB 4S 2 Direct connection cable Existing Cables User Made Cables lt GT01 C30R2 6P GT01 C30R4 25P 3 GT01 C100R4 25P GT01 C200R4 25P ea GT01 C300R4 25P GT01 C10R4 8P The cable need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC a 2 GT01 C30R4 8P GT01 C100R4 8P compatibility when they are used with the GOT the PLC of MELSEC Q series GT01 C200R4 8P GT01 C300R4 8P MELSEC L series MELSEC QnA MELSEC A series and MELSEC FX series GT01 C30R2 9S GT01 C30R2 25P WS0 C20R2 2 3 Ethernet connection cable Shielded twisted pair cable
66. cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction APPENDICES DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal display screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen and backlight please consult your nearest sales office or FA center For the life of the liquid crystal display screen or backlight refer to the following L gt 3 2 Performance Specifications 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 17 1 Daily Inspection E Daily inspection items No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Check for loose Retight Cl ithin th ified t 1 Installation status of GOT a i sbi Securely mounted Peg ere ee eye en ges pete mounting screws range Retighten screws with A Loose terminal screws Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver Connection J 2 Proximate solderless status Visual check Proper intervals terminals Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Correct Retighten connector fixing screws Dirt on protection sheet Visual check 3 Forei t
67. chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Phone 81 3 622 160 60 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 dol L624 18073 Pr mer 3021120 900 Poe erry 35 86 00 one one MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc USA Fay 439 211 1206 999 Fax 46 0 40 93 23 01 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 MELTRADE Kft HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fert utca 14 Im Sch rli 5 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 HU 1107 Budapest CH 8600 D bendorf Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 LV 1058 Riga TR 34775 Yukar Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 371 0 784 2280 Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE Savanoriu Pr 187 4 B M Raskovoyi St LT 02300 Vilnius UA 02660 Kiev Phone 370 0 5 2323101 Phone 380 0 44 49433 55 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Systemgroup UKRAINE 2 M Krivonosa St UA 03680 Kiev MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Phone 380 0 44 490 92 29 Fax 380 0 44 248 88 68 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation
68. closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of J J Touching the OK button reflects the settings and restarts updating the clock display Then the settings are reflected to both clock data on the GOT and controller lt a a Zs O ae oo a wa O LO 3 Y E Zz O 8 Touching x button restarts the GOT if the clock settings is changed or closes the screen if clock settings is not changed GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 3 GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status Normal Normal Low None Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately For battery replacement procedure refer to the following CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN K gt 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 3 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 4 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 Time Setting and Display 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Zz PROGRAM DATA CONTROL z H 5 Zz m l The display of OS project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or SD card and the data transmission between GOT and SD card USB memory are possible The format of the SD card USB memory is also possible 2
69. control panel is opened 4 Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust water and other substances Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better Pollution level An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution levels An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment E Grounding The following are applicable ground terminals Use them in the grounded state Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive Protective grounding D Ensures the safety of the GOT and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 3 5 2 EMC Directive Q Zw lt gt Ok ea para ra 39 ae
70. data is downloaded after completion of OS installation When installing with the utility install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens 4 Installation cannot be interrupted Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Failure to do so may result in installation failure causing the GOT malfunction e Powering off the GOT e Pressing the reset button of the GOT e Turning off the SD card access switch of the GOT e Removing the SD card or USB memory If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur take the following action e If BootOS installation failed Install CoreOS lt gt 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS If standard monitor OS installation failed Install BootOS 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 16 4 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT Zz The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS When the screen 9 requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen gt E Operation procedure 1 When installing with SD card Power OFF the GOT switch the SD card access S 7 switch to OFF and install the SD card where the E BootOS standard monitor OS
71. describes how to operate the Ethernet I F assign The setting operation is same as that of the communication setting screen Communicat ic Standard I F Setting _ Chilo RS422 495 1__ A Ona L OCPU L OIT Iced ChNo RS232 g Host PC ChNo USB g Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection Assign i Ethernet F CH Driver assign OK Ethernet I F a ChNo Ethernet standard I F None No Ethernet standard 1 F O None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device Other 10 1 Communication setting 7 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Communication Setting After the screen shown left is displayed touch the channel number specification menu BOX when changing the channel number ECF 10 1 4 E Channel number setting operation For changing the parameter settings touch the driver display BOX C gt 10 2Communication Detail Setting Touching the OK button reflects the changed settings Touching x button returns the screen to the Communication Setting screen Touch the OK button in the Communication Setting screen Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING E 5V power supply operation The following describes how to operate the 5V power supply 7 Touch the 5V powe
72. devices GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 E Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT Multi channel function Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi GOT Products 1 for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Connecting Non Mitsubishi products to the GOT Products 2 for GT Works3 Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT N GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT E Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Reading data from the GOT Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Verifying a editing project to a GOT project E Others ee A GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Configuring the extended function and option fu
73. display ner snecta i eii ireren 13 66 T3210 SRAM COMOL oai aate a E A E ep eee pee aes 13 68 13 2 11 GOT data package acquisition 20 20 22 cece cece ceeeeeecee cee eeeete eee ee ce ecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneecniesaeeeeeeeeees 13 73 13 2 12 Operator information MANAGEMENL ec cece eeeeeee eee eete eee eeeaaeeeeeetaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaes 13 74 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECk 141 Debug rere perme erer ere aa prone re a a aa rere rercer reer epi rererrr ery ert peer a 14 1 taet SSYStSM MOMLOM Asch eae seectiloaee T havaatten ATO 14 1 TAT AMIS OIO aa E ERN E E a DAtra aetelas 14 1 TAES EXCISE COONS cede AA EAR ORTA TAALA OR AAE AAE O aes 14 1 141 4 Backup restorationic gec aces ie adhe ieie aaia i i aaa iea ATA EEE 14 2 t2 NOSE GHOCK Na xs ithes faves highs ee dee cas sh ced Pana te be Sank vasedeu dees sadeuaana ths TAT taeda hana beeen 14 3 Eat Memory Check 2 ce ui er ceed dai nec eet nts E a eden dates 14 3 14 222 DrawinG CNG E cccriics sles negate ee E nage Bates A AN senate teen tnt renee 14 6 14 23 Font check ao erines i asin vies el ane addin ade diene ee 14 10 14 2 4 Touch ipanel heck sca iiss acie Hine in eee eee edie cee 14 12 TALO VO CMOCK erra o E cacao teas gael pepe ev desea Gehman 14 14 74 2 6 gt Ethernet status ChOCK oari renane ENE EE ER 14 17 14 3 System Alarm Display onirin anin iiia aiii aii ianiai a ieee ia ened 14 19 W424 GOTS INE e bagi oan hast as eawenah od fi
74. displayed in Name Date and time The size of drive The date and time when each file was created are displayed Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Operation switch Number of files 13 12 1 2 Execution switch of each function Displays the total number of the displayed files Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following lt 13 1 4 Display file 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Alarm information operation 1 Display operation of Alarm information Alarm information screen Alarm information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM v Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Alarm information Size Date Time 13K 07 13 11 14 18 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive
75. eel yee ase woZ mkoko LOO C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate D Internal SRAM alarm log files GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 11 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Alarm information Alarm information screen Alarm information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory Internal SRAM D Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Xi Alarm information Number 1 Item Select drive Kind Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected When SD card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed SD card A Built in SD card USB memory E USB drive Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Name Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc lt _ 13 2 2 m Alarm information operation 4 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed Size Displays the size of the file
76. eonia i ie aia aaa ee i iaaii a eiii 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting FUNCTIONS cece eee eeeeree eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseneaaeeeesenaeeeeteeenaeees 10 1 10 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting eee cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseenceeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaees 10 1 10 1 3 Communication setting Contents 00 00 cece etter ee erent AE EET E EEEREN 10 2 10 1 4 Communication setting Operation cece etter eee ee eee tie eee eeetaeeeeeetaeeeeeetieeeeeeeaa 10 4 10 2 Communication Detail Setting i ee eee cee entree erent eee aaa A a A 10 8 10 2 1 Communication detail setting FUNCTIONS 0 eeenee eee teereeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeaaeeeeteeeaaeees 10 8 10 2 2 Display operation of Communication Detail Setting 0 cc eeeeeeeeeeteeee eee ettneeeeeetneeeeerens 10 8 10 2 3 Display contents of Communication Detail Setting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeaeeees 10 10 10 3 Ethemet Setting i cc8 ascetic er in cede ee de ei 10 15 10 3 1 Ethernet setting fUNCtIONS ee cece eeeeeee eee ee teeeeee eee teeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeenaes 10 15 10 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet Setting eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseeaaeees 10 15 10 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet Setting 0 ec ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeseeeaeees 10 16 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP TEL Displays S tng erann fe les Aaadag abevnees aad Oe can T sn thd ce canta deat cdo 11 1 Tet Bunctiono
77. folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select a destination Next Cancel 6 Touching Exec button displays the dialog box Copy file name shown left PROJECT 1 Copy destination A PROJECT2 Copy now OK Cance 13 20 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 4 File is already exist Overwrite now Copy is completed Property display operation Touch OK button If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder starts to copy When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder Touching OK button starts copy Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder 1 Title Screen Operation Display Screen Operat ion2 B 15 B 16 B 20 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching Property button after selecting the project data to display th
78. found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CON ou A 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal
79. hea ae eel eed eee A 7 MANUALS a ce ae lee est tre aka aces Nag 2 alata ea ka antes tae a a eens A 13 QUIGKREFERENGE muaren nlr en ii a a alia Beadle aa ea aa aa i Ea AA a AS ea enna A 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS a e eraan e aaa aaa aaa aaa aa iaia A 15 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL cerise aaaea aeia a aa eieaa aaia iaa A 20 1 OVERVIEW LI PAOS iin E EE EATE EEEE EEE AEA 1 2 tt Rough procedure cat uchiha ei ee een bin ete acl 1 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall COnfIGUratON 3 esses etait EE A EEE N Gahan A E NO 22 System Equipment irer a R a date aud E AA EE CID A DA K E P DEA A AE A TASE AE E E E 22 2 COPIO a a aa a a a a a aa a aaa aae heed 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specification S i a a aa e aaaea a cel a aaia aaa aaa 3 2 Performance Specifications nsee eirinen eaae aae aeaea e a aain aa kaani edian 3 3 Power Supply Specifications cececccceeccecceceeeeeeeeeeececaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeseceeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecscenaeeeeeeeess 4 PARTS NAME Aa ON RE a a not che aa Raa aa ans EE a aA E a a tana naka ann 42n BACK Paneli x ctccittee satire ite E A NE E Bal aan E O T EE a RER ET e E BR EEA ATA A O AE E A A E EES 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5T SUES CUL Standards aiana aa a a a a a a a a A S2 EMG Directives naaa E E A 5 2 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecceeccasaeeeeeeeneess 5 2 2 EMC Directive Compliant System Config
80. holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface 2 Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below Provide a grounding point near the GOT Short circuit the FG terminals of the GOT FG frame ground and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 81in or shorter The FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency 3 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control panel a Store the GOT within the control panel locked and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel b Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the
81. if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control Ferrite core equipment Use the thickest Panel cable possible grounding Remedy 2 1 7 4 7 WIRING 7 1 Power Supply Wiring Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Remedy 2 2 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and communication cables so that they do not cross each other 3 Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers NFB electromagnetic contactors MC relays RA solenoid valves and induction motors For surge killers refer to the section to follow 5 E C3 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment T Uncrossed power lines and Crossing power lines and communication cables fa o communication cables QS nO GOT connection cable GOT connection cable PLOWO wire 2 O 5 i O W oO n Drive control wire r 1 Lu Terminal block Terminal block Z 2 A lt aw 7 2 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make
82. in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction CAUTION e Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 0 18
83. is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 41 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z gt a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO 6 Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved 1 Touch and select the file to move Advanced Recipe Information DIR GIP ARPOOO1 2 Touch the Move button HI6KB 386 1584KB 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive DIR PROJECT 1 GIP ARPOOO1 1K TXT JARPOOO1 HOOKB 3861584kB Please select destination Execute Cancel 4 Touching Execute button displays the dialog box Target file ARPOOO1 GIP shown left Do you want to move the fi le Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When any file with the same name exists in the Target file ARPOOO1 G1P destination folder the dialog box shown left Do you want to overwrite the file appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels moving 6 When moving is completed completion dialog box Process completed is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 42 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Rename operation
84. is insufficient in the user memory Insufficient user memory RAM ae capacit Jag x i es e Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has been 522 Unnecessary file deleted to created create new file Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files 524 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device 525 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project x files under different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file The file specified for the file conversion does not exist 526 File conversion failed i ee f x Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted f The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT main unit Please Error in SRAM Failed to write aw 528 data consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or x l representative 529 Data error in SRAM Error in SRAM data due to battery voltage low etc x Check the battery life Confirm the battery status N The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel Improper monitor device 530 is not the monitor target x Confirm monitor channel j Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen dat
85. oP0002 OPOOO3 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touch Operator management in the operator setting menu The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed For operating operation switches refer to the following Addiers L gt This section 4 a a EE EAT L gt This section 4 b D l lenreccnareniniininiiie L gt This section 4 c WINGO seszesestzcccssecesedesadecscesbacees This section 4 d IIMPOltesscaceieeiieeiertneeeen ek lt This section 4 e EXPO rer lt gt This section 4 f After all settings are completed touch the Save button and then the settings are saved Touch the X button without touching the Save button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 77 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt Q in 0 e ina g3 a le re i O a ca Q 8 FILE DISPLAY AND a Add operation Add opera
86. of GT Designers e When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device When the station number specified in the switching station No device is not set in the Ethernet setting add the station number to the Ethernet setting When the station number does not exist in the system change the data of the switching station No device Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer The station number set in the GOT s utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module or in the project data Check the following contents so that the multiple station numbers should not be the same e Check the GOT s station number in the GOT s utility e Check the station number set in the project data e Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer e When using the station No switching function check the data of the switching station No device Channel No storage 425 448 449 A duplicate IP address has been detected Confirm the setting PLC cannot handle as requested Correct devices Dedicated device is out of range Confirm devic
87. or contact your local distributor Product name Contents USB memory Commercially available USB memory 2 Battery Sold separately Battery for clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value Battery 5 GT11 50BAT advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups a3 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Stand Sold separately Product name Contents GT05 50STAND Protective cover for oil Sold separately GT05 50PCO Protective sheet Sold separately Stand for 5 7 Product name Contents Protective cover for oil For 5 7 GOT Product name Model name Contents GT14 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT14 50PSGB Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet GT14 50PSCW Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT14 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Drawing software Sold separately Product name Model name Contents SWLIDNC GTD3 E GT Designer3 i O indicates the version Drawing software for GOT1000 series PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GOT USB Mini B PC USB Project data transfer cable GT01 C30R2 9S 3m GOT D Sub 9pin PC D Sub 9pin Panel mounted USB port extension Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents Panel mounted USB port GT14 C10EXUSB 4S 1m ext
88. or not to continue installation are Exsisting OS Ver 05 27 00 AM displayed Expected OS Ver 05 27 00 AM zs Exsisting basic 0S and other 0S and 2 Touching the OK button executes installation im project data will be deleted Touching the Cancel button cancels installation ag Do you want to install After executing or canceling installation restart the 26 GOT a5 H On TE GOT screen when BootOS is installed from SD card or USB memory Z 8 Emo 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 9 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 10 E Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS 140 O Standard monitor OS 2 0 0 Communication driver An O Communication driver 2 0 O Optional function OS 2 0 O Optional function OS 2 0 0 Please match the number Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version e Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility For details refer to the following 13 2 1 OS information e Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face MITSUBIS
89. oz OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10 1 3 Communication setting contents This section describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting Standard I F Setting ChNo RS422 485 lt 2 3 1 MELSEC FX 4 ChNo RS232 2 ov supply 3 gt 2 Mul tidrop slave 4 ChNo USB lt 2 3 gt 9 Host PC 4 ChNo Ethernet lt 2 None lt lt 4 Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 6 External device 9 PC connection Hie ip CH Driver assign OK 5 1 1 Channel Driver assign Communication Setting x Channel No can be assigned to the communication driver installed in the GOT a Not writing Communication Setting in drawing software Without writing Communication Setting in drawing software communication with a controller is available after assigning the channel No with this function KLS 10 1 4 ll Channel Driver assign operation b When changing the assignment of the communication driver to the channel in the Utility Without using drawing software the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When changing a communic
90. p controller 8 1 a 8 7 bes Commercially E o a Hae available xt o Te aa USB Refer to Panel mounted Refer to USB mouse S mema USB port Commercially u wu y 8 2 extension 8 10 available oO J Serial USB Batte Refer to multi drop Refer to s keyboard X 8 3 J connection Commercial FA unit 8 9 available Personal wW Protective Refer to eel Refer to computer sheet 8 4 Commercial 2 4 adapter 8 8 available F H a lt aw RS 232 485 r Printer i Refer to f le D Commercia adapter 8 11 y available 4 Only hard copy of the screen can be printed 2 2 System Equipment STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT14 55 QTBDE z t Communication E Built in Ethernet o interface S Power type D DC24V Z Panel color type B Black Display device type L monochrome black and white T TFT color High intensity wide angle view Resolution Q 320x240 QVGA 9 x Display color type 0 Monochrome black and white 16 scales 5 65535 colors Screen size type 529 7 GOT1000 series GT14 5 oO O 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 Explanation of the option model name GT kKK 50 Dedicated for 5 7 16 Dedicated for GT16 15 Dedicated for GT15 14 Dedicated for GT14 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 Common for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 GT10
91. protective sheet visually by the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceed replacement promptly 8 6 8 OPTION 8 4 Protective Sheet 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil Use of the protective cover for oil improves waterproof property oil resistance and chemical resistance of the GOT Lu i i gt 8 5 1 Applicable protective cover for oil i The following protective cover for oil is applicable for GT14 Product name Description Z Protective cover for oil 5 7 protective cover for oil l Z0 8 5 2 Installing procedure BZ cas no Zz O Before attaching protective cover for oil lt A protective film is attached on the display area when the GOT is shipped Make sure to remove the protective film a before attaching the protective cover for oil L For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel follow the procedures as 2 below e Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance e Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel z e a lt fo 7 Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED on the GOT front face and the direction of the cover is decided STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL Protective Cover For oil Please do not pull the oil cover more than the necessity 2 On
92. provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT1ioo9oo0 GT14 User s Manual MODEL GT14 U E MOD 09R823 JY997D44801F afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications are subject to change without notice a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
93. recipe file Confirm whether the SD card or USB memory is installed x ipe file e Confirm whether the SD card access switch of the GOT is ON e Confirm the available memory of the SD card or USB memory Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file Unable to save device value to 583 p e Confirm the write protection of the SD card or USB memory x Advanced recipe file AE d e Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing 584 Advance recipe file save error Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe x is operating An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading 585 Advanced recipe file upload error Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while the Advanced Recipe x is operating 586 Specified Advanced recipe The advanced recipe of non existing number is about to be executed z number does not exist Execute advanced recipe of existing number 587 Specified record number does The advanced record of non existing number is about to be executed not exist Execute record of existing number Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value cannot be edited Cannot save recipe data to read A i 588 eee Make the recipe device value of the record editable with Advanced x i Recipe Setting of GT Designer3 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edite
94. representative 16 5 1 Installing the CoreOS E Before installing the CoreOS 1 Installing procedure The CoreOS can be installed only when using a SD card Installation via USB memory USB Ethernet is not available 2 Boot OS When installing the CoreOS the latest BootOS is also installed automatically Operation by the user is not required 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 11 16 5 CoreOS UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SUPNIASPVON IO lt esE p SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF 00 10 10 0 KOs 12 E Installing the CoreOS Communicate with Memory Card EE Memory card write OE core 05 write Destination Memory Card f Wine Check GOT Type GTI 4 0 320x240 Data can be written into the memory card Boot OS Version AM 16417 Kbyte Procedures for GOT Write and precautions lt Procedures of Core OS Write gt 1 Tum off the GOT and insert the memory card in which Core OS being written into the GOT 2 Tum on the GOT 8 Wait for fom moments until Core OS wits starts the GOT ny card and retert the GOT when the wit is completed obo ick Soon oft the GOT or prees down the reset switch whi
95. screen Hard copy information screen Advanced recipe information screen Logging file CSV file Logging file TXT file Logging file binary file Logging information screen A drive D drive E drive With GT Designer3 any folder name or file name can be specified 2 ii The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data 2 Each folder is created automatically when a file is installed downloaded or uploaded 3 The USB memory cannot be activated directly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage L gt 13 2 1 OS information 4 The folder names and file names can be set at System Settings in System Environment of GT Designer3 aw GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 5 A serial number is automatically added to file names 6 Each function does not provide direct storage to the E drive 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 1 OS information E Function of OS information Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS PC communication driver and Option OS by which each drive A Built in SD card C Built in flash memory E USB memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Description Reference Displaying file folder data The file folder type na
96. series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 MOV D36 K4M20 Battery voltage low M32 i el Output to external device of PLC Activated the output upon battery voltage low detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected For details of system information refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 5 MAINTENANCE AND oe PANHA E Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mi
97. th icati p Ethernet 1 F assignment ouc e ariver Sp ay oO e communica Ion 2z E parameter to be set in Ethernet I F assignment SOF Ethernet standard 1 F 3 lt o Ter Ethernet standard 1 F BES Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device Other CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 3 The screen switches to the Communication Detail Ethernet FX setting screen GOT NET No 1 Set icati t f thi GOT IP Address 792 1 et communication parameters from this screen GOT Port No COMM For the setting change operation refer to the Gateway 0 Subnet Mask 255 following Retry 3 Startup Time 3 Timeout Time 3 Delay Time 0 gt 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Communication parameter setting by drawing software Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication Ba parameters for each communication driver a Z When changing the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at a communication detail setting of GOT S Z Z L gt GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals jo On INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 9 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 2 3 Display contents of
98. the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using For repair of the backlight contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT11 50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to the User s Manual of the GOT to be used TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due
99. the screen to the GOT Setup screen 2 Trigger backup settings For operations of the trigger backup setting refer to the following OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP L3 E Trigger backup settings 3 Max of backup data T Touching the setting items displays the keyboard Pac kup ren oration ER Input numerical value from the keyboard iDrive for backup setting A Bui ld in SD card Drive for backup data Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 ee When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the Trig bkup setting number of backup data to be stored Max of bkup data bo 1750 Oe Nimi t G 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents ee CPU No setti MNO Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT ESS Setup screen 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Drive for backup setting A Build in SD card Drive for backup data A Build in SD card Trig bkup setting Setting Max of bkup data Lo 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents pan Se Hal Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT 2 Enable CPU No setting NO Setup screen 1 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting E Trigger backup settings When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting Rise Time are met the GOT automatically backs up d
100. to incorrect output or malfunction TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on the Time setting amp display screen utilities screen In addition confirm that the adequate battery life remains on the rating plate Transporting the GOT with the low battery voltage or the battery the reached battery life may unstabilize the backup data unstable during transportation Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User s Manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Vierten hig a A A A ii dee ate eae ete A 1 INTRODUCTION s a ts tet tab date le tins tee fetal cata De ite i tals 1 oh lett A 7 CONTENTS tiatiacetniithron eect dian Gh eel
101. two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL Power line Power line Connection NG p cable Connection al F cable p Pullout hole Pullout hole INSTALLATION Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference Power line 100mm or more a Wiring duct Separator WIRING Signal line Power line Signal line OPTION 7 WIRING 7 5 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on off signals from certain control equipment referred to as load hereafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other L Load AC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment
102. up all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the backup touch the Cancel button When touching the OK button in 2 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button start the backup Touching the Cancel button cancels the backup When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the backup Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the backup The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 11 GOT data package acquisition Zz O E GOT data package acquisition function 5 The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB re memory E OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS E Special data e Project data a The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data of For installation function of the GOT refer to the following ES ZPS lt 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory FE a cig SES E Display operation of GOT data package acquisition BSS Main menu Program Data control 8 gt gt 9 3 Utility Display
103. 02 CSV Change file format Example Dialog box if the G1L gt CSV button is touched File conversion from GIL to CSV Source file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Change to LOGO0001_0001 CSY Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed 2 5 2 Operation of GiL CSV conversion G1L gt TXT conversion Logging file G1L file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on PC i Touch and select the G1L file to convert into a CSV file or a Unicode text file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file G1L gt CSV button Unicode text file G1L gt TXT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted g Infor
104. 16 scales are used to improve the display e High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115 2kbps e High speed display and high speed touch switch response The operation performance is improved by the analog touch panel More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works e The 9MB built in flash memory is included as standard e SD card interface is included as standard e RS 232 interface is included as standard e RS 422 485 interface is included as standard e USB interface host device is included as standard e Ethernet interface is included as standard e System font types are increased by the adoption of the font installation system e Four types of alarms system alarm user alarm alarm history and alarm popup display are integrated and realizing an efficient alarm notification Enhanced support of FA device setup tools e Transferring or monitoring the sequence programs using the PC connected to GOT is available during connection to A QnA L Q or FX series PLC CPU FA Transparent function 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 1 1 Rough procedure The outline procedures before operating GOT and the descriptions of each item are shown below gt Install GT Designer3 in the PC Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Be f Fundamentals 5 Create project data L3 Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Sc
105. 2 1 Communication detail setting functions Function Description Communication parameters Set various communication parameters of communication devices The settable parameters differ according to the setting communication device Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Keyword Clear For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled Keyword Protect For the FX series PLCs with the 2nd keyword in use the cancelled program protection in the PLC can be reactivated 10 2 2 Display operation of Communication Detail setting E Communication settings CannlniicatiionkSsttine Touch the driver display BOX of the communication Standard I F Setting g parameter to be set in the Communication setting screen ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection Ethernet jp Driver assign OK z xl 2 The screen switches to the Communication Detail MELSEC FX setting screen 7 E Shand 715300 BPS Set communication parameters from this screen ria i ro TIMES For the setting change operation refer to the Communication following Timeout Time SEC parameter Delay Time 0 ms K 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyword Regist Delete Cl
106. 3 46 Target file A ARPOOO01 G1P Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels creating When creating is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 10 Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller aca aes 3861584KB Fi le Name Setting No 2 Name product2 Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to load record Process completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 1 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value 3 Touching the Load record GOT PLC button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching the OK button starts loading record 5 When loading is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 2 Various Data Control 13 47 lt lt x Q z x in oO le iva a a le ro ja o
107. 3 This section 2 COPY steieren orter esie rieka L3 This section 3 Rename L3 This section 4 Touching x button closes the screen 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 29 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL j on nO 13 30 2 Deletion operation Deletes selected files 5280KB 3862528kKB Del Copy Rename Delete file name SNAPOOO1 BMP Delete now Delete is completed x File 7 Touch and select the file to delete 2 Touching Del button displays the screen mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion ci When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed 4 Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Copy operation Copies the selected file Copy file name SNAPOOO1 BMP Copy destination Copy now File is already exist Overwrite now Copy is completed Touch and select the file to copy Touching Copy button displays the message Please select a destination in the left bottom of the screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Exec button displ
108. 38400 19200 9600 4800bps Connector shape D Sub 9pin Female RS 422 485 Application For communicating with a controller Terminating resistor Open 110Q 330Q Switched by terminating resistor selector switch At factory shipment 330Q RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800bps RS 232 Connector shape D Sub 9pin Male Application For communicating with a controller connecting a bar code reader RFID connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function Built in Ethernet Data transfer method 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1ch interface Connector shape RJ 45 modular jack Only for models equipped with Ethernet USB ication For communicating with a controller using the gateway function connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps Host 1ch Connector shape TYPE A Application For transferring data storing data App USB Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a PC project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function Buzzer output SD card SD standard 1ch Supported memory card SDHC memory card SD memory card Application For uploading downloading project data OS installation storing logging data Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure IP67f front section of the panel only Externa
109. 6 6004 Fax 20 0 2 235 96 625 25 Boulevard des Bouvets Fax 32 0 2 717 64 31 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 rece ET Rata anore Calar Koning amp Hartman b v BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman b v NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie F ME f l H Re Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21 23 1L 49001 Petah Tiqva ax 33 0 BE 1800 Vilvoorde NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V IRELAND Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Fax 972 0 3 9240761 Irish Branch Fax 32 0 2 257 0249 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 aaa Terri eee Park Ballymount INEA RBT d o o BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA e u a nae Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487 Lebanon Beirut F sane 0 l y 98890 BA 71000 Sarajevo NO 3002 Drammen Phone 961 0 1 240 430 ax 353 0 Phone 387 0 33 921 164 Phone 47 0 32 2430 00 Fax 961 0 1 240438 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V ITALY Fax 387 0 33 524 539 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 aan pana AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S A PORTUGAL l PA rr i Brine e 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 R Jo o Francisco do Casal 87 89 Ph chia I iama BG 1756 Sofia PT 3801 997 Aveiro Esgueira AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE WEA a Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Telefono 351 0 234 303 900 ant Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 351 0 234 303 910 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V POLAND INEA RBT d o o CROATIA Sirius Trading amp Servi
110. A C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Flash Memory of the C drive can be read written normally 5 T 5 S20 D drive memory check Checks whether the memory Internal SRAM of the D drive can be read written normally B D 2 E drive memory check Checks whether the memory USB memory of the E drive can be read written normally 2 2 lu r P E E Display operation of Memory check eee Main Menu Debug amp self check Self check lt S gt 9 3 Utility Display lt a a Zs O E oo a we 0 LO Communication setting ST GOT setup 2 Tine setting amp display E Program data control m 1 0 check O ga Debug amp salf check i ae K Memory check self chec A Touch Debug amp self check N S lt x Memory check 9 Memory check fn belect Drive a A Built in SD C Flash Memory Fe E D Interna SRAM ou eae zz ZO jo a WwW On Select the memory to check and touch Check INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 14 2 Self Check E Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following L gt 8 1 SD Card 8 2 USB Memory When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the SD card or
111. AWA Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FAS500 FA M3 STARDOM Ethernet YOKOGAWA Connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC EtherNet IP AB Connection to SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 SIEMENS S7 200 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Microcomputer connection Computer Inverter connection FREQROL 500 700 MODBUS R TCP connection MODBUS TCP Connection to Azbil control equipment Azbil SDC DMC Connection to RKC temperature controller RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS E Display operation of I O Check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Nenu Debi f checi Communication setting chee GOT setup i chee Display check Time setting amp display stem a i splay Touch panel check C Program data control gal Debug amp self check Self check Touch Touch I O check Debug amp self check I O check 1 0 check Please select check channel 1 R8422 485 gay 9 R5232 14 14 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E 1 0 check operation 1 Connecting target confirmation Touching CPU button carries out the connecting target confirmation communication check 1 After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog CPU communication check Pra Par x z Fxecating DOA box mentioned left notifying that it is on checking until the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally 2 When the connecting target confirmation CPU an nle
112. C zZ im Se Sez 6ES EWE Eas Que Sie 25 sao off b When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered Protection level is selected by Registration conclition 2 Applicability of monitoring for each keyword protection level 8 The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows me eyo When ki d and 2nd k d When only keyword is registered pant Act So INES a a registered Keyword z 5 m Item Read Erona unregistered pu G Alloperation Incorrect ae NE eon Read Write Write protection naoz prohibition write prohibition Protect cancelled aaeain prohibition Device monitoring T C setting values and file register x Device from D1000 change O O O CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY Other than the above 4 When the T C setting values are specified indirectly changing devices is available 3 Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition When AIl Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When AIl operation prohibition is selected device display and input are possible although operations by the programming tool are all prohibited FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10
113. C24 MELDAS C6 Change Play i 2 None Change 8 Barcode Change 2 9 Host PC Modem 3 As the communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is displayed touch it Change assignment K Channel No 1 Please select communication driver Ed None A MELSEC FX AJ 10C24 MELDAS_C6 A QnA L QCPU L QU 1024 X y 3 id Continued to next page 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication setting 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver assign screen and touch the OK button Channel Dr iver assign g Ed 1 A QnA L QCPU L QU71024 Change 2 None Change 5 Touch x button to return to the Communication 8 e Barosde Change Setting screen 9 Host PC Modem 6 Confirm that the selected communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 is assigned 7 After confirming touch the OK button 8 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection Binal q tt Driver assign OK E Channel number setting operation 1 Touch channel number specification menu BOX Communication Setting Standard I F Setting to be set R3422 485 2 The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed So a Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerica
114. CB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW For GT15 GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW ForGT11 ST11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO For GT10 USB environmental protection cover Stand Attachment Backlight GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70VLTN GT16 70VLTTA GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board Connector conversion box Emergency stop sw guard cover GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 42S GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV Memory loader GT10 LDR
115. CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD E Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Main Menu GOT setup splay GOT setup Touch Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate Ips Behavior when a device of the same IP address as the GOT s address joins the network Do not maintain a network connection i E Setting operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs 11 22 1 Touching the setting item changes the setting items e Maintain a network connection rec Behavior of duplicate Ips K Behavior when a device of the same IP address as the GOT s address joins the network Do not maintain a network connection o The GOT stays connected to the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards A system alarm occurs Do not maintain a network connection The GOT is disconnected from the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs 1 2 Precautions for selecting Do not maintain a network connection When selecting Do not maintain a network connection the GOT is disconnected from the network at the addi
116. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 13 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 2 Delete Registered keyword is deleted 7 Touching the Delete key pops up a keyboard for keyword input 2 When the correct keyword is input and the Enter key is touched the keyword is deleted Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 3 Clear To access an FX PLC where a keyword has been registered keyword protection is cancelled 1 Touching the Clear key pops up a keyboard for keyword input 2 When the correct keyword is input and the Enter key is touched the protection is cancelled Keyword Please input keyword Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword or Customer Keyword to cancel the protection FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword only into keyword to cancel the protection 2nd keyword is ignored 4 Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection 7 Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection 10 14 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 3 Ethernet Setting 10 3 1 Ethernet setting functions The contents of the Ethernet setting in
117. Control panel 1 2 Precautions on installation Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range e Specified torque range 0 3 to 0 5N m Undertightening can cause a drop Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the GOT or the mounting fixtures Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect Precautions for protective cover for oil The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover e When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT do not stretch and bend the cover too much Doing so may Cause a separation between the sheet and rubber Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine e When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp cloth Do not do a frequent detaching the protective cover for oil It causes deterioration in the oil performance and the medicine performanc
118. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 2 Display operation of Operation Main menu GOT setup F gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Pe Behavior of gt Touch GOT setup Operation Operation Operation BG Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Na Security setting Touch an item to Utility call key change settings Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Touch panel calibration USB mouse keyboar d OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 3 Setting operation of operation E Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume Operation x f Touching the setting item changes the setting items Buzzer volume SHORT Window move buzzer ON Security setting Setting 1 Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Touch panel calibration Setting 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents USB mouse keyboar d Setting Touching x button restarts the GOT and reflects OK e the setting contents 2 E Security setting For the security setting operation refer to the following lt 11 2 4 Security level change E Utility call key For the utility call key operation refer to the following L 11 2
119. ECTION APPENDICES ee Ermes ee z Error message Action code storage Channel CH No 1 to 2 to communicate with a controller is not set ro After setting the Communication Settings on the GT Designer3 Communication channel not set 480 download it to the GOT oO Set channel number on Utility ee Change the channel assignment in the Communication Setting on the utility Please turn on the PLC and the i 487 Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again O GOT again Inactive channel No has been set in the project data Inactive channel has been e Check whether any unnecessary channel No has been set in the 489 selected at Communication project data O Settings e Check whether channel Nos set in the project data are set in the Communication Settings 500 Warning Built in battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased x is low Replace the GOT built in battery The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted 510 Clock data input out of range s x Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash 520 Insufficient Flash ROM capacity memory x e Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified buffering area size A The capacity for the buffering area
120. ETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY Checking the upper left part of the screen FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returns to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally L l D 7 a Zz oO faa Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 13 14 2 Self Check 14 2 5 I O check E 1 0 check function The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardware are normal To execute I O check the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designers3 Note that the GOT restarts when this function is performed For the details related to the installation of the communication driver refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 Communication drivers inapplicable to I O check When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed Connection type Communication driver Connection to MITSUBISHI PLC Ethernet connection Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Ethernet YASK
121. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card When removing a SD card from the GOT make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break When installing a USB memory to the GOT make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact Before removing the USB memory from the GOT operate the utility screen for removal After the successful completion dialog box is displayed remove the memory by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop resulting in a damage or failure of the memory Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Always ground the FG terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the produc
122. GT Designer3 to the SD card again A a 3 Sw The GOT main unit is broken 325 GOT error Py tan i Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or 559 Contact your local sales office ozo representative SD card error The SD card is defective Check whether the SD card can be used 1 Format the SD card and re execute 6 Installation will be cancelled 2 Replace the SD card The message F P ww iediaplaved GOT type and OS version do not match The GOT type selected at Core OS write of the GT Designers is not correct a 2 ao pay Installation will be cancelled Confirm the GOT type and perform Core OS write again OF on the GOT Ze m The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT T 5 Installation will be cancelled Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer3 a 5 2 Confirm the version of OS Memory card access switch is off Installation will be cancelled The SD card access switch is off Turn the switch on and restart the GOT 5 a Turn on the switch and restart the GOT Zee eae DoF TT lt Bo SES Cae FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SUPNIYAPVON IO lt esm p SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF 10 51 0NM 00 LON 12 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 13 16 5 CoreOS 16 14 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 CoreOS 17 MAINTE
123. GT09 C300R40102 9P 30m oO Z GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m rar connecting oer to OMRON PLC serial communication unit communication board me serial communication board RS 232 cabl cable GT09 C30R20102 25S 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit z O H a 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 3 2 2 System Equipment Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Product Cable Model name Contents name length GT09 C30R41101 5T 3m GT09 C100R41101 5T 10m RS 422 cable For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C200R41101 5T 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T 30m GT09 C30R21101 6P 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit Connection cables for Panasonic P Product name RS 232 cable LCs Sold separately Model name cable Contents length GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m For connecting GOT to Panasonic RS422 232C conversion adapter GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of Panasonic PLC computer communication unit GT09 C30R20903 9P 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic PLC GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately
124. HI 2A MITSUBISHI When the Boot OS version is 2 digits GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL only the lower digit is printed modeL GT1455 QTBDE f IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX Example H W version H S N 1160003 AN ATN S N 1160003 HD AN Boot OS version AD AA HD v MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 SF E E ing plate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION BootOS Rating plate HD MADE IN JAPAN ve rsion MADE IN JAPAN Ve rsion GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL modEL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed Normally the CoreOS has not to be installed Precautions for installing CoreOS When executing the CoreOS installation once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the following to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate e Powering off the GOT e Pressing the reset button of the GOT If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or
125. INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Zz O Standard Monitor OS 5 2 For the installation using GOT the SD card or USB memory storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required E For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the SD card or USB memory the following three methods 5 are available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer3 g C3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals aF zezZz 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed TE C7 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL FE Sui iS 8 3 Using SD card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive 25 L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals r g E POINT obs gt 26 25H Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in SD card or USB memory zup o0 When writing BootOS standard monitor OS etc in the SD card or USB memory be sure to execute by the utility of 2a other GOT GT Designer3 The installation is not executed properly with the SD card or USB memory to which uploaded from the utility of GOT z a or copied by software other than GT Designer3 2 52 Note the available capacity of the SD card or USB memory g32 The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of GT Fae Designer3 lt 8 S
126. INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 7 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 8 2 When installing with USB memory OS information Size Date Time 11 08 12 15 20 11 08 12 15 20 BO0KB 3861584KB Up load Install A Touch Install Now installing BootOS Reboot Property Data check Install the USB memory in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of GOT Display the data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed After confirming normal restart display the USB device status screen and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of GOT 13 2 9 USB device status display 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Zz O Standard Monitor OS 5 2 E BootOS installation z When installing BootOS GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten
127. INTENANCE AND aitelU M SOON eee INSPECTION APPENDICES E Checking error messages with the utility Utility The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set 14 3 System Alarm Display Error code and reference manual z Channel No O uy Error code Description storage Reference source PAS destination aes Error code of CPU for ACPU User s manual of the ACPU connected with GOT Value of D9008 Error code of the following controllers Controller FXCPU 2 GS263 i User s manual of the controller connected with the GOT 100 to 299 Third party PLC i i Deal with errors according to the error messages Temperature controller OMRON temperature controller only 300 to 399 Error code of the GOT main unit function 5 E ode of the GOT x GOT 400 to 499 E a Gs262 4 communication function 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 500 to 699 Erro code of the GOT main unit function Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264 CPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU User s manual of the QCPU and QnACPU connected with Value of SD0 for QCPU QnACPU GOT Motion Error code of Motion controller 10001 to 10999 User s of the Moti ontroll ected with GOT contr ller o Q173DCPU Q172DCPU er s manual of the Motion controller connected wi CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Error code of CNC Q173NCCPU GS263 User s manual of the CNC C70 con
128. Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or folders On 1 The A Built in SD card is not displayed when SD card is not installed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user 5 3 Ea x S8 lt gee JOE cee 282 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 65 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 9 USB device status display E Function of USB device status display This function displays a list of the USB device connection status in the GOT Also this screen is used to remove the USB device from GOT E Display operation of USB device status display Main menu Program Data control F7 9 3 Utility Display Program data control 13 66 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E USB device status display operation S dis Do you want to stop USB device USB device has been stopped USB mouse keyboard recognition When using the USB mouse keyboard install USB mouse keyboard of the extended function OS to the GOT When the USB device is installed to GOT the screen shown left is displayed USB mass storage is displayed in Device and Stop button is displayed in Attach Touching the Stop button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button execute the pr
129. License Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P E Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation former Yamatake Corporation OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd FUJI FA Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation FUJI SYS Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE FANUC Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of
130. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Nooo GT14 User s Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions O DANGER resulting in death or severe injury j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAU TION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the A caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS e Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during mo
131. NANCE AND INSPECTION STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction e Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit ja Z a 6 ma Fao ab Zo ie 2 TROUBLESHOOTING STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can
132. NGGEE DACRE Setg for each backup setting are met Default None Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored Setting range 0 to 50 Max of backup data When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to Default 10 be stored YES NO Enable CPU No setting Set the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO Default NO E Display operation of Backup restoration setting Main menu GOT setup F 9 3 Utility Display AF Operation Transparent mode Backuo restorattyg sett ing Touch Behavior of cup Ps GOT setup Touch Backup restoration setting Backup restoration setting Backup restoration setting x Drive for backup setting A Build in SD card Drive for backup data A Build in SD card Trig bkup setting Max of bkup data o 1 50 0 No limit Enable CPU No setting x 11 18 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting E Setting operation of backup restoration setting 1 Drive for backup setting drive for backup data 7 Touching the setting item changes the setting items a S Backup restoration setting Drive for backup setting A Build in SD cang Drive for backup data N A Bui ld in SD card 1 Trig bkup setting Setting j 2 Max of bkup data 1 50 0 No limit Enable CPU No setting Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns
133. OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 17 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Project information Project information Project information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Project information Storage file folder display screen K Project information B OKB 3862528KB p File Property Data check Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive When the SD card is not installed A Built in SD card is not displayed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the project data Project Folder in the selected drive 3 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed s Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 The size of drive ae a ae Only the size in use is
134. OT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above E ga Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C Eo O Zz O E lt z 2 zZ WIRING OPTION 6 INSTALLATION 6 3 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 5 Installation Procedure The GOT is designed to be embedded into a panel Mount the GOT by following the procedure below For the panel cutting dimension refer to 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension Also be sure that the thickness of the mounting panel face is 2 to 4mm 1 Installing the packing Install packing to the packing installation groove on the back panel of the GOT While referring to the cross sectional view of the packing shown left push the thinner side into the packing groove Left drawing is the example of lateral format Magnified illustration Packing installation groove Packing cross sectional view 4 Inserting direction 2 Inserting into the panel face Insert the GOT from the front side of the panel Mounting hole Enlarged view 3 Fixing the GOT Engage the hook of the mounting fixture accessory to the unit fixing hole of the GOT and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0 3 to 0 5N m Mounting bracket Mounting screw 4 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is completed
135. Operator setting menu 9 3 Utility Display Operator setting menu Operator management COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Ev cor start time RR Till Operator information management Password change Debug amp self Operator information check management OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Password change CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt lt a lt oO fo me Q fa 8 m ve z SS lt x ie noo0 ase woZ mkoko LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 85 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Password change operation 1 Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility ERTO AJSIDIFIGJHIJIKIL LIXICIVIBINIM Enter Operator setting menu Z Touch Password change in the operator setting menu and then the Password change dialog box is Operator management displayed I Password change fr Function setting g Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons Input a present password Old password N A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabe
136. Ping transmission 14 2 Self Check If touch the select button of IP address of the other terminal a keyboard is displayed Enter the IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard lt Default 192 168 3 39 gt If touch the Ping transmission button a ping is sent to the IP address entered in IP address of the other station The timeout time is about 5sec e When GOT and PLC are in communication The dialog box showing Response received is displayed e When a communication error occurs The dialog box showing Timeout occurred is displayed 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 System Alarm Display Zz O 8 E System alarm function Z i System alarm is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or 2 network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen 2 For details of system alarm refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals A AG ae E Display operation of System alarm display Z cat Se 558 Main menu Debug amp self check 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check N Communication setting S GOT setup Self check E Time setting amp display eS System alara display 225 ca Program data control i GOT start ti gt FE m Ioe N Touch aee System alarm display a8 Debug amp self check zg EE noe System alarm display m z E x lt
137. SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 24 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY Zz STATUS DISPLAY z 5 Zz mi TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY gt g Setting items for clock display can be displayed from the GOT utility screen oF TE Be 8 S90 zZ 12 1 Time Setting and Display T EQ oz 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible bs i Q Function Description Reference lt 6 ee ew Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock data of PLC CPU connected with GOT 12 2 2 Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 3 a 5 3 GOT internal battery voltage status Changing times Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 3 gt ee Bs 206 noe 3532 i Z Eins wn Ww Bb xpo SEY Sz tee When the time is changed on the Time setting amp display screen the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though Adjust or Broadcast is set for Time setting As a result the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though Adjust is set for Time setting The clock data of the controller set as Adjust CH No of Time setting in GOT Setup Clock Setting from GOT Environment Settings
138. SPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control e Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT x Touch the Import button Operator information management OperatorName ID Level U Administrator OPO001 1001 10 OPOO02 1002 12 OPOOOS 1003 12 OPOOOS 1005 15 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed The import process overwrites Touch button and then the Admin password sige pled ri proceed authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input The import process of operator the dialog box shown left is displayed and the information file is completed oS operator information stored in a SD card is imported to the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 83 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro i O oa ca Q 8 FILE DISPLAY AND f Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a SD card OperatorName ID Level Update Administrator OPO0001 1001 10 2012 07 22 OPO002 1002 12 2012 07 22 OPO003 1003 12 2012 07 22 OPO005 1005 15 Sele
139. Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Indicating controller Control equipment Controller PC CPU module GOT server GOT client Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation Generic term for controller manufactured by each corporation Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Intelligent function module Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS RTU MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL E Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual POINT Refers to the information required ji 7 3 es tr
140. T SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E Drawing check operation Zz The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching Drawing check on the Display check menu 2 1 Before execute drawing check 5 Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the Z next check in each step during drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the 2 Display check screen For GT1455 Q 65536 colors the screen is displayed in os color blue black red purple green light blue yellow and Upper left touch Upper right touch E 5 Qa white position position Z Also for GT1450 Q monochrome 16 scales the screen EOS color is reduced to monochrome 16 scales and displayed 325 This section explains in the case of GT1455 Q 65536 SES colors n Z z a Missing bit Color Check 225 By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue 2 a gt black red purple green gt light blue yellow white b Ho Check missing bit and color visually eras ef ase Zag 83 ee Light blue Yellow Be F Ska ome To b Basic figurecheck screen Touching the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen displays the following b Basic figure check screen b Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Fil
141. T clock data E The setup methods of clock data are shown below 5 Time Setting amp display OBS 1 Touching the clock display section displays the keyboard for input and stops the clock update i Clock setting Adjust 5 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below 96 16 2011 15 54 59 TUE Input the scheduled time when the operation of 3 2 is to be carried out since the input time is reflected of GOT internal battery None Low at the time of the operation of 3 z ES voltage status The day of the week is displayed automatically Sys according to the input date iS 2 The effective range of clock setting is as follows 828 Jan 1 2000 to Dec 31 2037 g Key Description E a 0 to 9 Input numeric value in cursor position N lt gt Move the cursor h a 3 Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Del Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display 2 a 2 The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed Se Enter 8 p lt The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of d a F 5 E Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the w keyboard Ome Cancel The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is
142. T error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 613 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 3 System Alarm Display 14 4 GOT start time E GOT start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT E Display operation of GOT start time Main Menu Debug amp self check lt gt gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu 4 Debug amp self check 7 Communication setting GOT setup Self check EA Time setting amp display Ej System alarm display Program data control GOT start dime D Touch GOT start time Debug amp self check Start time Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 06 28 2011 TUE 11 54 37 Current Time 06 28 2011 TUE 12 01 43 Operating hours Oh O m O6s 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 21 14 4 GOT start time E Display of GOT start time Eman GOT Start Time Start Time 06 28 2011 TUE 11 54 37 Current Time 06 28 2011 TUE 12 01 43 Operating hours Oh Ofm 06s Item Description Start Time Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Displays op
143. T1555 Q Abbrevia ion of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbrevia ion of GT1550 QLBD Abbrevia GT1455 Q Abbrevia GT145 GT1450 Q Abbrevia GT14 Abbrevia ion of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT156D GT1550 ion of GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE ion of GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE ion of GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1275 GT1275 V Abbrevia ion of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbrevia ion of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbrevia ion of GT1275 GT1265 area Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA 6T1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT11 Abbreviation of GT1150 GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbrevia GT1050 Q Abbrevia ion of GT1055 QSBD ion of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbrevia ion of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 Q Abbrevia ion of GT1040 QBBD Abbrevia GT1030 ion of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW GT1020 GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT1040 GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020
144. TINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt E lt Q x ua 0 fe oO a SS oO 0 S a ve z Ss lt eine noO0 ase woZ mkoko LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD E Display example of OS information OS information OS information Storage file folder display screen OS information Size Date Time A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM ISS20KB 3862520KB File Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected 1 Select drive When the SD card is not installed A Built in SD card is not displayed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder 2 Kind 2 In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21st character or after are not displayed 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displaye
145. TION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF 00 10 10 0 KORF 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Built in flash memory Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT C G1BOOT BootOS Installed at factory shipment BootOS can be installed from GT Designer3 or the SD card When installed from GT Designer3 or the SD card that stores data with SD card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment status OS boot drive set to the A drive A G1BOOT Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and deletion of the OS file or project data touch key control or display function of th d guid Required for displ d ti f th as See ney are peter ofte user ain tasn memory Senda oe soreon data Not installed in GOT at factory shipment ees it Syst t infi tion fil Install it fi GT Desi 3 or the SD card ag or ystem screen management information file eet Yu a esigner3 or the card or SDcardthatstoresdatawiih TrueType numerical font a id z A OS boot drive set to the A drive At installation select Mincho or Gothic for A GASYS 12 dot standard font Gothic the 16 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Mincho 16 dot standard font Gothic 16 2 16
146. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy Touching A button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching A X button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects the file For G1A CSV G1A TXT delete copy graph operations refer to the following G1A gt CSV G1A gt TXT gt This section 2 DGC es isiro This section 3 CODY AEE This section 4 Touching x button closes the screen 13 13 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro i O oa ca Q 8 FILE DISPLAY AND 13 14 2 G1A CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion operation The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file Example When G1A CSV button is touched Source file AAMOOO00 G1A Destination file AAMOOOOO CSY Convert now File is already exist Overwrite now Process completed Touch and select the G1A file to convert into a CSV file or a TXT file The following dialog box is displayed when touching the following button according to the file type to convert to e CVS file G1A CSV Button e TXT file G1A TXT Button Touch OK button When the file whose name is the same exists i
147. U No setting at backup to YES or NO Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that Behavior of duplicate Ps of the GOT is added to the network afterwards OS information Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property checking OS data Deleting or copying alarm log files Alarm information Converting alarm log files in G1A format gt CSV or TXT format Downloading uploading deleting or copying project files displaying project Project inf ti een mney file property checking project file data O x Ol O ojojoj O x OjO x Hard copy information Deleting or copying hard copy files changing hard copy file names Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format gt CSV or TXT format Converting advanced recipe files in CSV or TXT format gt G1P format Deleting copying or moving advanced recipe files creating a new advanced recipe file o Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing advanced recipe folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading or matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Advanced Recipe information Program data control Converting logging files in G1L format gt CSV or TXT format olojoj oloj ojo x OJO x Logging information Deleting copying or moving logging files changing logging file names Deleting logging folders or creating a new logging folder Memory car
148. USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in SD card A drive memory check install the SD card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations Memory check elect Drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Internal Flush memory area write read check Execute now Select a drive to check in the Select Drive screen in Memory check and touch Check button 2 Touching Check button displays the dialog box on the left Selecting OK button displays the numeric keyboard window Selecting Cancel button returns to the initial menu 3 Touch to input password 9 o and touch Enter key Touching Enter key executes read write check for the built in flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds 14 4 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check 1 Password change The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog box is Internal Flush memory area write read check displayed Touching OK returns to the Memory check screen Passord ennon Internal Flush memory area write read check
149. When installing from GT Designer3 a message is displayed on the PC screen Follow the instructions in that Z message 325 1 When only BootOS is stored in the SD card or USB memory ze 328 7 The message indicating disabled installation is Boot OS hes been already installed displayed Existing OS Ver 05 27 00 AM o Expected 0S Ver 05 26 00 AL 2 Touch the OK button to cancel installation Because of version down GOT aborts After canceling installation restart the GOT aoe installing 26 gt E m Boo OK 992 za6 8 3s Zz 2 When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS are stored in the SD card or USB memory OE lt 2 f Skip the BootOS installation and install standard Skz Boot 0S has been already installed monitor OS and other OS Exsisting 03 Ver 05 27 00 If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the z Expected OS Ver 05 27 00 GOT the following message is displayed z Exsisting other OS and Special data and o project data will be ee 2 Touching the OK button executes installation Do you want to install 4 Touching the Cancel button cancels installation age After executing or canceling installation restart the 5 zE GOT z38 LOO or Wo a 3 When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the SD card or USB memory a Z conditions 1 and 2 above mi 9 g a AT The version information and a dialog for selecting 8 as Boot OS has been already installed whether
150. XT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 38 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 CSV TXT G1P conversion operation CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to an advanced recipe file G1P file ced Recipe Information Name Size GIP ARPOOO1 E SE 3861584KB IFile pe Information Name DIR GIP ARPOOO1 Please select dest ination File conversion from TXT to GIP Source file ARPOOO1 TXT Convert to ARPOOO1 G1P Do you want to convert the fi le This folder already contains the file ARPOOOO1 G1P Do you want to replace the existing ile Modified 11 05 18 15 17 with this one Modified 11 05 18 15 17 1 To select the file touch the check box of CSV file or Unicode text file to be converted to a G1P file 2 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for ou
151. YS2BKUP s 3 F trigger time setting screen Specify the day and time y 3 to make backup copies In the screen specify the days and time that the Day GOT executes the backup Sur Mon Tuel Hed i Fr il Sat Day Select days that the GOT executes the backup Execute Wiot execute by touching displayed items Tine Multiple days can be selected g 9 Time Set the time that the GOT executes the backup OK by touching the displayed item Precautions for setting When the trigger type is set to Rise set the trigger device with GT Designer3 in advance Failure to do so disables the backup setting with Rise set 11 20 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs E Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards Maintain a network connection rec The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of Do not maintain a network connection the GOT is added to the network afterwards Default Maintain a network connection rec Behavior of duplicate IPs 1 When the IP address duplication is not checked When the IP address of the GOT is set to 192 168 0 18 the IP address duplication check is not performed Depending on the device to connect with the GOT the IP address duplication check may not be performed
152. a 535 Cannot open image file Confirm whether any file exists in the SD card or USB memory x ee e Confirm whether image files in the SD card or USB memory are Image file error or invalid file 536 normal x 18 18 format 18 TROUBLESHOOTING e Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm ae Ermes i eee j Error message Action code storage Error occurred while executing the auto repeat function of the touch switch object Confirm the following Auto repeat error Confirm 540 e Confirm that the other system error has not occurred during auto x system information repeat e Confirm that any error information is not stored in the system information GS during auto repeat The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range 570 Recipe device points too large p E a x Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range 571 Capacity shortage of user There is no empty area space in D drive x memory RAM Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe file with 581 Abnormal Advanced recipe file incorrect contents Delete the advanced recipe file from the SD card or x USB memory Cannot generate advanced recipe file Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again Cannot generate Advanced wa 582
153. a check refer to the following Install 3 This section 2 Upload This section 3 Property L gt This section 4 Data check L gt This section 5 Touching x button closes the screen 13 7 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL j on nO j 2 Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive built in SD card or E drive USB drive can be installed in GOT This item explains using the A drive OS information Select drive A Built in SD ae C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information Kind Name Size Date Time DIR G1S S 06 16 11 16 0 15520KB 3862528K6 OFile Install is completed Restart now Install the SD card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 3 Touching Install button starts the install 4 When the installation is completed the dialog shown left is displayed Touching OK button restarts GOT 13 8 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Flash Memory can be upl
154. a A face E A 14 21 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS eeseeeesseeeesseerrssrerrresnns 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT eee ee een ree ee eee ee eeeae eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeedeeeeeeeaaas 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 00 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeenaae 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 16 9 16 5 COPE OS E E A ee nted i ead eek sand A A ch bead A N E E dees 16 11 16 5 1 J Installing the Cor OS oaeeo ra E atin he OE EEA eee 16 11 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed ccccccceececceceeceeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesiaaeees 16 13 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION A Daily INSPSCtON r aaa a ernie ini etal Sa ae eat aa 17 2 17 2 Periodic INSPeCtiOn 232 s ca hsecteskeeras i cdeuea aae a aed sa anced etna a A a aa e A a Raana 17 2 T7532 Gleaning Method es 2c Ate wid adenine eid Aten atid eae 17 3 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement cececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeneaaes 17 4 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detecti
155. als 1 2 2 2 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Packaging Enclosed in product S ored in CD ROM ored in CD ROM ored in CD ROM Manual Number Model code SH 080866ENG 1D7MB9 SH 080867ENG 1D7MC1 SH 080868ENG 1D7MC2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 ored in CD ROM SH 080869ENG 1D7MC3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 ored in CD ROM SH 080870ENG 1D7MC4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 QUICK REFERENCE E Creating a project Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing ored in CD ROM ored in CD ROM ored in CD ROM SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Setting details for figures and objects Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action 1 2 2 2 Setting functions to use peripheral
156. ard copy files changing hard copy file names Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format gt CSV or TXT format Converting CSV or TXT format gt Advanced recipe files in G1P format Deleting copying or moving advanced recipe files creating a new advanced recipe file Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders changing advanced recipe folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading or matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Converting logging files in G1L format gt CSV or TXT format Deleting copying or moving logging files changing logging file names Deleting logging folders or creating a new logging folder Formatting a SD card or USB memory internal SRAM Displaying the available memory of the GOT 13 2 4 13 2 5 13 2 6 13 2 7 13 2 8 USB device status display SRAM control GOT data package acquisition 9 2 Utility Function List Displaying the status of USB device Confirming the SRAM user area usage backing up or restoring the data in the SRAM user area and initializing the SRAM user area Copying the OS special data and project data to a SD card or USB memory 13 2 9 13 2 10 13 2 11 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Item Functions overview Reference System monitor Devica monitor of PLC test function present value change of the buffer memory 14 1 1 monitor and the buffer memory of intelligent module 5
157. ata How to use the trigger backup refer to the following manual lt gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 E Display operation of Trigger backup setting f Touching a setting item for the trigger type changes Trigger backup settings H 3 Maser the setting No Backup setting Type etail A i a 1 SYSTBKUP Rise qQxoood None Rise Time 2 syszexup Tine SS Ws Se 3 SS 7 None The GOT does not execute the trigger backup 4 Rise The GOT backs up data when the trigger E j device turns on Time The GOT backs up data at the specified time Check the file register changes oK Bitxecute MiNot execute 2 Touching a setting item for Check the file register 3 changes changes the setting Execute When the backup is executed the GOT checks if data stored in file registers are changed after the previous backup When the data are changed the GOT backs up the changed data Not When the backup is executed the GOT does execute not back up data stored in file registers even if the data are changed after the previous backup 3 When the trigger type is changed the setting is defined by touching the OK button Touching x button returns the screen to the backup restoration setting screen 4 When the trigger type is set to Time touching a Trigger settings time setting item for Detail switches the screen to the Target data S
158. ate an error occurs on the screen etc O Occurs always O Occurs sometimes Action Occurrence frequency Example Once a month Proceed to 1 b b Checking of the displayed error code system alarm O Can be checked O Cannot be checked c POWER LED O Lit in green Error code system alarm Example 460 Communication unit error Take the action for the error code system alarm or error message checked If the status does not change after the action is taken proceed to 1 c Proceed to 1 c The power is supplied normally Proceed to 1 d O Lit in orange Screen saving is being performed The read device of the system information may have been turned ON when the device was set and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status Check the setting of the read device When no problem is found in the setting proceed to 1 d O Blinks in green orange O Not lit d Screen display O The screen is completely black The backlight has run out The power is not supplied When the power is supplied the GOT hardware may be faulty Replace the backlight If the GOT is not restored proceed to 1 d Check if the power is supplied If the GOT is not restored proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation The liquid crystal display or BootOS may be faulty Perform the following in order 1 R
159. atien check communication ends its result is notified by dialog box o error If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally the dialog box notifying of the normal termination mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check If the dialog box mentioned left is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication check confirm the following e No misconnection with CPU LC gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 e No missettings of parameter 10 2 Communication Detail Setting e No hardware error C gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING Touching OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check CPU communication check Error The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error ox 2 Self loopback Touching Self carries out the hardware check of RS 232 interface 1 For preparation for the self loopback communication GT14 Rear face check insert the connector for self loopback check je mt Goel Customer purchased shown in the diagram left in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins and 4 and 6 pins respectively Self loopback In the communication setting of the GOT utility set check connector the channel number for the RS 232 interface to 0 None
160. ation 5 For writing reading into from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer refer to the following manual A Specifications and operating procedure are described F Qa C gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Z g 325 S02 Ssf2 E Function of advanced recipe information 558 For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function copy delete file output are available In addition it is possible to writing reading into from a controller by using this function without creating the screen to R operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 is required g Function Description Reference a D z Z5 Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 35 13 37 lt 2 i 5 G1P CSV conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 13 38 FA m G aog G1P TXT conversion G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file 13 38 SSVITXT GIR CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to G1P file of advanced recipe file 13 39 za conversion ate Advanced recipe S G information screen Del File or folder is deleted 13 40 8 2 A File is copied 13 41 OE File is moved 13 42 S 5 a Rename File name is changed 13 43 Create Folder New folder is created 13 44 Create G1P New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created 13 45
161. ation driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance 2 Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT14 There are the following 4 types GOT front face GOT rear face 2 GOTO F N MITSUBISHI cs Lh SD CARD E sD t A avoc ae 1 H Q gt a USB interface standard interface RS 422 interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface Ethernet interface Standard interface RS 232 ee For communicating with PC drawing software bar code reader RFID controller or controller RS 422 485 For communicating with controller USB ieviecedevetcencens For communicating with PC drawing software Ethernet For communicating with PC drawing software or controller 10 2 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication setting 3 4 5 6 Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No to use with standard interface Refer to this section 4 for driver that can be assigned to each channel 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1 2 S
162. ation of the GOT a GOT main unit b Communication interface c Cable between the PLC and GOT SSS E i i h If any other module etc is used please describe it d Cable length m 2 System configuration of the PLC a Power supply module b CPU module c Serial communication unit computer O Used link module O Not used d Network module O Used O Not used e Interrupt module O Used O Not used f Positioning module O Used O Not used g Number of extension stages stages Entry area for recurrence when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken 3 Describe the operation situation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reoccurred 18 10 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT controller or network there are two kinds system alarm and advanced system alarm For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm refer to the following 3 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions Error code and channel No Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function The channel No where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT special r
163. aves data in the SRAM user area to the selected drive 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 69 13 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt lt Q ug 0 O oO a SS oO 0 S Q ve lt SS lt L EAT oao ase waz mkoko LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD E SRAM control operation 1 Operation to initialize all or selected areas of the SRAM user area SRAM control Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date speared sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 ep venced user alarm 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 25 0KB 475 0KB Initialize all Backup restoration Initialize selected area Restoration Example Dialog box when touching the Initialize all button 1 Caution Start initializing SRAM This process may take a few minutes After completion of initialization GOT will be rebooted Do you want to initialize ox Do you really want to execute 1 Perform any of the following operations e To initialize all areas of the SRAM user area touch the Initialize all button e To initialize selected areas of the SRAM user area select the check box of the area to
164. ay cause the protective 25 sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off S22 In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices n oO zZ E WwW l e E Display operation of Clean H 3b Main Menu AOL gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Time setting amp display 28 al onz Ic Program data control 2 S A Debug amp self check Haa aa lt lt Go JE rent Touch Clean FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates E Operation of Clean After cleaning the screen touch the screen following the instruction displayed After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK The following screen is displayed Zi az gu aka ae zz ZO nO SLL On INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1 15 2 eel 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS Zz o H BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR Zz m OS gt g For executing the GOT utility install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive built in flash memory of the on GOT or set the OS boot drive to A Standard SD card and insert the SD card with OS fil
165. ays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 31 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt Q z in oO le iva a a le ro ja os lt gt Jo pee a oao OFF WW AI mkoko re S 4 Rename operation Renames the selected file 7 Touch and select the file to change the name 5280KB 3862528KB 2 Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed B _ Tea AC DEL 0 9 Narea oa 1213141516718190 SIE I T EE 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box Before SNAP0001 BMP shown left After IMG0001 BMP Change fi lename 4 Touching OK button starts renaming file 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box Process completed is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 32 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 5 Advanced recipe information Zz o H 5 Zz m Before using advanced recipe inform
166. bbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Description GT15 PRN Video input unit RGB input unit Video RGB input unit Video RGB unit GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT Multimedia unit CF card unit CF card extension unit External I O unit GT16M MMR GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 4 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set E Option Abbreviations and generic terms CF card Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC SD card Option function board L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB GT15 MESB48M Battery Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW For GT16 GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PS
167. ble network manual O 801 Abnormal baton passing status Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual O Abnormal cyclic transmission A 2 st tus Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual O u 803 Refer to explanations of SBOOEE on the applicable network manual O e Check if the switch settings have no error 850 CC Link switch setting error e Check error codes stored in SWOO6A O e Refer to explanations of SBOO6A on the applicable network manual e Check if terminating resistors are connected Ta e Check error codes for the PLC CPU Abnormal cyclic transmission 851 stat e Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master station O u e Check the error status of the master station e Refer to explanations of SBOOGE on the applicable network manual e Check if the cable is unplugged or not 852 Abnormal host line status f O e Refer to explanations of SB0090 on the applicable network manual Check the transient error occurrence status for each station stored in 853 Transient error SW0094 to SW0097 O 18 20 e Refer to explanations of SB0094 4 When an error occurs FFH is stored to the channel No 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions E External dimensions of GT14
168. ces stl ROMANIA Private Bag 2016 Poland Branch a 5 ZA 1600 Isando Krakowska 50 Losinjska 4a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 Phone 27 0 11 977 0770 Pa da Bali HR 10000 Zagreb RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 alas Fee Arkae 2 o Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 ax 27 0 Fax 48 012 6304701 Fax a 36 940 03 ni l Fax 40 E 430 40 02 l UA EERON Russia AutoCont CS s r o ZECH REPUBLIC INEA RBT d 0 0 ERBIA 52 bid 3 Kosmodamiansk haf Technologick 374 6 Izletnicka 10 R BOSA Me amlanskaya Nab 6 Noor CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec SER 113000 Smederevo ade ih Phone 420 595 691 150 Phone 381 0 26 615 401 E Rete Fa wan 595691 es 381 0 26 615 401 m MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V SPAIN oe PENMANE Prue ai LOVAKIA aan ei DK 4000 Roskilde SK 911 01 Trencin ayes saii Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Phone 421 0 32 743 0472 Phone 902 131121 34 935653131 Pend RE Se Fax 34 935891579 re jjer Parone Eesti 0U ESTONIA ane pol sr o Pre ov SLOVAKIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V A iinn ey faa baa UK Brondi a Phone 372 0 6 518140 Phone 421 0 51 7580 611 UK Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB fax 372 06 518149 Fax 421 0 51 7580 650 Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d 0 0 SLOVENIA u n n vila z Jubijana ie oaie CORPORATION JAPAN phone 358 0 207 463 540 Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 eee f Fax 358 0 207 463 541 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 8 12 1
169. ch an item to be edited a Level b Password c Make a permanent password d Use ext auth ID e Ext auth ID For how to edit operator information refer to the following lt This section 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added Touch the Cancel button or the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control c Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT Operator information management OperatorName ID Level Updat Administrator 7 OP0001 1001 10 OPO002 1002 12 OPO003 1003 12 JPO005 1005 15 Target operator OPO005 Do you want to delete the operator The operator information deletion process is completed J Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information 2 Touch the Delete button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 3 Touch the OK button and then the selected operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete operation is canceled 4 When the delete operation is completed a completion dialog box is displayed 5 Touch the OK button and then the dialog box is closed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 81 13 2 Various Data Control lt
170. ch for resetting the hardware Use an isolated rod to operate Terminati sist lecti 14 ie See pena For switching the RS 422 485 communication interface terminating resistor 15 Ethernet communication status SD RD Turns on in green during data communication LED 4 PARTS NAME 4 2 Back Panel 100M Turns on in green during 100Mbps transmission 4 3 Rear Face 10BASE T 100BASE TX OVERVIEW Description CONFIGURATION SYSTEM For Ethernet connection to a controller PLC microcomputer board RJ 45 connector Holes for the mounting fixtures accessory when the GOT is mounted to the panel 4 holes at top and 2 Holes for unit mounting fixtures 2 or uni unting fixture bottom gt SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE PARTS NAME UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 PARTS NAME 4 3 4 3 Rear Face 4 PARTS NAME 4 3 Rear Face eel 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 UL cUL Standards UL cUL Standard are recognized in use by the following combination Model and Hardware version of the GOT LOT Item Model Hardware version of the GOT LOT GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE GOT GT1450 QLBD Version C or later GT1450 QLBDE RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P LOT 121 or later Checking method of hard ware ve
171. cified torque securely eC bad bad CARD INPUT PC and external rc 20 device connection TH cables b 1 malt Grounding 24VDC 1002 or less S power suppiy 7 1 2 Grounding the GOT E About grounding Make sure to carry out the following for grounding Carry out the independent grounding if possible Apply the class D grounding Keep the grounding resistance within 100 or less e If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Other Other GOT Other device device device Grounding 100Q or less Grounding 100Q or less 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding Not allowed Good condition 1 Independent ground Best condition Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible 7 2 7 WIRING 7 1 Power Supply Wiring E Recommended terminal shape Terminal screws should be tightened to between 0 5 to 0 8N m Terminal screws must be secured to prevent a loose connection thus avoiding a malfunction Do not tighten the terminal screw with a torque exceeding the specified torque Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions 3 2 Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless screw ter
172. ckage GX LogViewer PX Developer MT Works2 Abbreviation of SWODNN VIEWER E type software package Abbreviation of SWOD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWODNC MTW2 E MT Developer Abbreviation of SWORNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series MR Configurator2 MR Configurator FR Configurator NC Configurator FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool RT ToolBox2 MX Component MX Sheet Abbreviation of SWODNC MRC2 E type Servo Configuration Software Abbreviation of MRZJWL SETUPLEE type Servo Configuration Software Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWL SETUP WE Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWOD5C FXSSC E Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE Abbreviation of MX Component Version O SWOIDS5C ACT E SWOD5C ACT EA Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version O SWOIDSC SHEET E SWOIDSC SHEET EA LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E E License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms
173. com www mitsubishi automation com
174. controllers For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual 3 GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 L oad TT 7 a Zz oO faa Ww a 14 1 2 A list editor gt MELSEC A list editor allows changing the sequence programs in ACPU QCPU A mode a Zz For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual 2 ir L3 GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 2 z Ze On 14 1 3 FX list editor FX list editor allows changing the sequence programs in an FX PLC For display contents and operation procedure refer to the following manual L gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 1 14 1 Debug 14 1 4 Backup restoration E Display operation of Backup restoration Main Menu Debug amp self check S 9 3 Utility Display Time setting amp display Program data control gal Debug amp sglf check Touch Touch Backup restoration Debug amp self check Backup restoration function Backup restoration function Main menu Setting SY 1BKUP Channel 01 ao Backup function Device gt 60T D Restoration function E GOT gt Dev ice aa Delete backup data FX keyword E Operation of Backup restoration Backup restore data from the controlle
175. ct an output file format to export the operator information The export process overwrites existing files Do you want to proceed This saves unsaved changes The export process of operator information file is completed 7 Touch the Export button The dialog box on the left is displayed Touch the following buttons according to the output format for the file Binary file Binary button CSV file CSV button The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in the GOT is exported to a SD card file name AUTHINF G1U 13 84 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Password change 1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed UTILITY FUNCTION 2 Display operation of password change Main menu Debug amp self check
176. ction Communication timeout f j ae Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error 402 Confirm communication pathway O alice e This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier ules when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host e Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received SIO status error ae ee bes Confirm the cable omission status of the PLC and the transmission 403 Confirm communication pathway O speed of the computer link or modules Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function a e Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the Specified station access is out of CC Link connection via G4 406 range O APLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed Confirm station no Confirm the station number of the project data e When monitoring other networks Accessed other network 407 Reconfigure the Routing Information Setting of GT Designer3 or the O Change network setting Routing parameters of GX Developer Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU 410 b
177. ction COVED ccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesneeaeeeeeess 8 9 8 6 2 Installing Procedure ciccss ceberieancnnsbisdaceqeaveseheceducusascdeahusdasecetansesaeedusesascametisinceretunseseeedasianene 8 9 87 LAIN ate anna a Mia le ret aae a E ca cna coded set T nice na does ena Attu dade teat ede ees 8 10 8 7 1 Applicable stand in a lee hind ale ied eae alec eden Ea aah alee 8 10 3 7 2 Installing procedure t 4 nAeiini des nr ara ete cd a r A a ince a 8 10 8 8 Connector Conversion Adapter c cccceecccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeescaaanaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenninneeees 8 11 8 8 1 Applicable connector conversion adaptel ccccccecceceeeeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesensieeeeeeeeees 8 11 8 8 2 Installing procedure of connector conversion adapter eccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeees 8 11 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Uniit ceccececcccccecce cece eee eeceeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseccecaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeiaeees 8 12 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit 2 0 cece eeeeeee eee ce eee ee tees ceaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsececenieeeeeeeees 8 12 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit c cece cece eeeeeeeceneeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeecsteneeeeeeeeees 8 12 8 9 3 Installation c0 0 cilantro led dees 8 12 ae T Parts Mame EE EEE A EE EESE iad wen S ET E S E E ETEEN 8 13 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive 0 cccccceceececeeeceeceeeeeeeeeee
178. cute the FA transparent function 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the GOT Setup screen 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 17 11 3 Transparent Mode Setting Zz O H S Z i 20 ez BES Eos SwS 22s Sie 2a5 SEG Szo o 0 zZ W on Zz O gt E tc AE Q w Do faye ao Lu N E Q CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting The storage location for backup data can be set For how to use the backup restoration refer to the following manual L gt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT A Built in SD Card E USB memory Default A Built in SD Card The drive for storing backup settings including parameters and passwords for controllers can be selected Drive for backup setting A Built in SD Card Drive for backup data The drive for storing backup data can be selected E USB memory Default A Built in SD Card The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified None Rise Time Trigger backup setti
179. d A i Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe setting that Recipe device save error Recipe j 589 _ is set for not using file x file does not exist f s Specify the advanced recipe setting that uses file Recipe device upload error Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe 590 Recipe device value does not device value is not set x exist Specify the record of which recipe device value is set The advanced recipe setting is not correct Advanced Recipe error Check f 591 reae data Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it x i P to the GOT again ce Logging file error 595 Logging file error h ae x When collecting data again delete logging files and management files 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 19 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND coll ESON eeo INSPECTION APPENDICES me Ermes 7 ee a Error message Action code storage The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph setting does not 596 Logging setting does not exist or exist x setting value error Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging setting that exists The error may be caused by a failure in the GOT Please consult your 605 USB device I F error ae i f x local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 611 Improper job files The contents for job fi
180. d Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 The size of drive Ne 7 Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following L gt 13 1 4 Display file 13 6 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E OS information operation 1 Display operation of OS information 0S information AS GISYS Size Date Time 1346K 08 26 09 00 471 500K 08 26 09 00 48 FON 406K 08 26 09 00 48 61D 3K 08 26 09 00 48 61 871K 08 26 09 00 49 FON 16K 08 26 09 00 49 117K 08 26 09 00 49 220K 09 01 09 17 08 3 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive in Select drive displays the information of the first folder of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy Touching 4 button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching A button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects and inverts the file For operation of installation upload property dat
181. d format Formatting a SD card or USB memory internal SRAM Memory information Displaying the available memory of the GOT USB device status display Displaying the status of USB device SRAM control Back up restoring and initializing of the SRAM user area GOT data package acquisition Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory O x APPENDICES App 7 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function O Applicable x Not applicable Not required Item Functions overview e114 ot11 Drawing Setting Selecting a base clock olo O Time setting amp display Displaying and setting the clock current time Oo Oo x Displaying the battery status O O x System monitor O O x FX list editor O O x Debug A list editor Oo Oo x Backup restoration O x O Memory check O O x Drawing check O O x Debug amp self check Font check ee x Self check Touch panel check x VO check O O x Ethernet status check O x x System alarm display Displaying error code and error message Oo Oo x GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating o o x hours Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display O O x App 8 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions a Zz x When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transp
182. displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can be carried out in Project information 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following L gt 13 1 4 Display file 13 18 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Operation of project information 1 Display operation of Project information a 1 Project information Kind Name Size Date Time 2 RE YIPROJECT 1 29K 06 16 11 16 287 a 3 4 2 Deletion operation Deletes selected files f 2 Delete project data PROJECT 1 Do you want to delete 3 Delete is completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touching a drive in Select drive displays the project data in the drive Touching project data selects and inverts it For operation of delete copy property data check download upload refer to the following Delete innana L gt This section 2 COPY A EEE L gt This section 3 ed Ke 0 5 eee This section 4 Data check L gt This section 5 Eee EE L3 This section 6 E eeetdeweteet teat L3 This section 7 Touching x button closes the screen Touch and select the file to delete Touching Del button displays the screen mentioned left Confirm the deletio
183. drawing software can be checked The setting of the host station can be changed For Ethernet setting refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 UTILITY FUNCTION 10 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet setting oO 2 E W D z e a og Z 5 Q oO Z SE ew To ow S90 L SE o mi Sz Main menu Communication setting lt gt 9 3 Utility Display o o zZ Main Menu Communication Setting E Ww Communication setting a z amp an Etherget setting 52 Sg 2 a y Touch ono gOS Ethernet setting CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY IP Address 192 168 3 2 12 168 3 1 132 168 3 3 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS INSTALLATION OF AND STANDARD 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 15 10 3 Ethernet Setting 10 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet setting The following describes the setting items and the display contents of the Ethernet setting Ethernet setting bd QUF IE Host NET No PLC No IP Address E 192 168 3 mS SS ae a eee 7 E 192 168 3 3 Restore default settings 1 Channel selection tab Channels can be switched Switching to the channel which does not have the Ethernet setting is not avai
184. dsisrecielecaresneteatendt This section 5 MVC 2icssccaiehisesritenests coe K This section 6 Rename C gt This section 7 Create Folder cceeeees This section 8 Create G1P cee eeeeeeeeeees C This section 9 Execute ccscceesaccecs L gt This section 10 to 13 7 Touching x button closes the screen COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 37 13 2 Various Data Control 2 G1P CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal computer Advanced Recipe Information PROJECT T ind Name DIRI GIP JARPOOO1 Name DIR PROJECT 1 GIP JARPOOO1 84KB 386 1584KB Please select destination Eeectite Cancel File conversion from GIP to CSY Source file ARPOOO1 G1P Change to ARPOOO1 CSV Change file format Example Dialog box if the G1P CSV button is touched 5 File conversion from GIP to CSV Source file ARPOOO1 G1P Change to ARPOOO1 CSY Do you want to overwrite the fi le Process completed Touch and select the G1P file to convert into a CSV file or a Unicode text file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file G1P CSV button e Unicode text file G1P T
185. e e It is not the one to guarantee all customer s environments Moreover it is not likely to be able to use it in the environment to which oil splashes for a long time and the environment with which Oilmist is filled 8 OPTION 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environmental protection cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environmental protection cover at factory shipment Replace when damage and deterioration are caused 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT14 Product name Description USB environmental aha GT14 S0UCOV Environmental protection cover for USB interface on the main unit front panel conforming to IP67f protection cover 8 6 2 Installing procedure 7 Turn the GOT power off USB environmental protection cover 2A Disconnect the USB cable from the GOT if one is connected open o 3 Open the USB environmental protection cover Mounting screw equipped with the GOT and remove the mounting screws 4 Remove the old USB environmental protection cover from the GOT to replace it with the new USB environmental protection cover 5 Fix the projection of the new USB environmental protection cover to be fitted into the hole of the GOT tighten the mounting screw in t
186. e displayed E Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation aoe process is canceled K 6 N 3 When download project data Ti GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS aoc When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the SD card or USB memory storing the project data and OS aS beforehand is recommended S 2 S The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen FE Fo Property aoa ame Date Time Seu OS Name sae Kind Size 11 17 Version 06 16 11 GIOSMONT OUT Standard monitor OS Basic 05 27 60 1355K G1F165L6 FON 06 16 11 11 17 16dot Gothic Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 500K G1F125LG FON 06 16 11 11 1 12dot Font Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 407K Explanation of OS version 01 00 00 A BootOS version Appears only when the property of the BootOS is displayed Minor version Major version lt lt A lt o oO O pe gt oO Q m ve lt Ss lt L EAT O OSE m eA mkoko LOO GIOSMONT 6 1D 06 16 11 11 1 wi System Screen Information ou Bas
187. e f l e Confirm the write protection of the SD card or USB memory 353 Confirm memory card is i x cored e Confirm the contents of the SD card or USB memory i Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating F i Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error ba ced x Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating Error occurred while reading in the recipe file bene Do not pull out the SD card or USB memory while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error x 18 14 18 TROUBLESHOOTING Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the SD card or USB memory 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm ee Ermes i eee j Error message Action code storage Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name File system error occurred in A SR Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register 356 PLC x Sa name Confirm file register e Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 357 Error in specified PLC drive e Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC x Confirm PLC drive CPU drive Execut
188. e Setting seeeeeeeees 11 6 11 8 C Clean scann A 15 1 17 3 Cleaning of display section 15 1 Communication Detail Setting 00 eee 10 8 Communication Setting cece eeeteeeeeeeeee 10 1 Connector Conversion Adapter 000000 8 11 COreOS aoina cadeacixs canned dessisiucclecasacddescacdcadants 16 11 D Daily Inspection eee eeceeeeeeeeee eee eeetteeeeeeeaees 17 2 Data type and storage location ceeeee 13 1 DEDU iis gine ean Aste iene 14 1 Display Setting ecua a 11 1 Drawing CheCK cccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseentaeeeeeteaees 14 6 E Error Message 0ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 18 11 18 13 Ethernet Setting cccccccccceeeeserneeeeeeeneaeeeeeenes 10 15 Ethernet status check cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 14 17 External Dimensions cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 1 F FILE DISPLAY AND COPY ccccccseteeeeeestees 13 1 Font Check ian aa a a 14 10 FX list editor nnana i 14 1 G GOT data package acquisition eeeeee 13 73 GOT internal battery voltage status 00011 12 3 GOT Restoration Sheet cccceeeeeeseeeeteees 18 1 GOT start time 00 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseees 14 21 H Hard copy information eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeen 13 27 VO CHECK E E S 14 14 INSTALLATION 0 cecceecceceeesteeeeeeeesteeeeeecsseeeeeeeees 6 1 K Key sensitivity setting 2 0 eeee
189. e box shown on the left OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents E Screen save backlight battery alarm display invert colors Ed 7 Touching the setting item changes the setting items Language Japanese ON OFF i i S opening sereen Wine Uae 2 Touching OK button defines the setting contents Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON 1 Brightness contrast Setting OK N 2 Touching x button without touching OK button With do not push OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left if you close the screen the changed OK button The changed value is canceled and value will be canceled the screen is closed q Ki Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed 3 Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 4 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 Display Setting E Brightness contrast E i P i i x 7 Touching the setting items displays the brightness F contrast adju
190. e corner of the cover is pulled outside and it hangs and do not bend it extremely it on the corner of the front panel of GOT The seat part and the rubber part in the display part might flake off Protective Cover For oil lt 2 z The corner is hung z x e Q 2 Q 8 OPTION 8 7 8 5 Protective Cover for Oil The corner on the left is hung and the oil cover is hung 3 The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel From A side to D side in the direction of the arrow 4 Please confirm all surroundings Check whether the rubber packing is fitted correctly into the groove on the under side of the GOT front panel and then whether the protective cover for oil securely covers the rubber packing part to prevent invasion of liquids into the Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front board 5 Mount the GOT onto the control panel When the 7 control panel is dirty clean the control panel The 1 Panel cut panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw Protectivecover dimensions tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are for oil e the same as those without the cover Mounting metal fixture t
191. e property displays the property as shown left In property display the following information is displayed Description Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data Drawing S W Displays name and version of the drawing version software by which the project data is created Touching a Y by one line button scrolls up down the screen Touching 4 by one screen button scrolls up down the screen Touching x button closes the property display and returns to the previous screen 13 21 13 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt E lt Q T ua 0 le o a Sa a fe S m ve lt SS lt L eine mee OSE m e mkoko LOO GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 5 Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected project file When data is normal Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file Data normal The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check 2 Touching OK button closes the dialog When data is erroneous Data error 6 Downl
192. e range The IP address of the GOT is the same as that of the controller Change the IP address of the GOT or the controller A device outside the range of PLC file registers and the buffer memory was specified Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC CPU Set the address for the special function module in the GOT monitor available range Set the device in the GOT monitor available range 450 451 460 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system e Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been switched e Check the cable connection status and the PLC CPU status e This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU becomes heavier when accessing other stations In such a case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host e Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Extension of END processing Setting of the number of processing times for general data Data update batch processing Q redundant system settings and Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual Q current config do not match Communication unit error redundant CPU system e Reset the power of the GOT e Replace the unit 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm 18 17 MAINTENANCE AND coll ESON eee INSP
193. e the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed e Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC PLC file access failure i 358 CPU drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the x Confirm PLC drive recipe function again after changing to other drives e Confirm whether the SD card or USB memory are write protected and execute the recipe function again When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name Processing from another f other peripherals carry out the process to the file register 359 peripheral device i i x Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe Execute it after function again S Se Zero division occurred by the data operational expression 0 divisor division error 360 f Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not x Confirm operation expression become 0 361 Specified device No is out of The entered file number is out of range x range Check the entered file number and enter a valid value 1 to 9999 When controllers are controlled with the GOT s time action function the 362 Invalid device value in time set No is our of range or the set device values regarding the op
194. e to copy 2 Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 5 Move operation An operation log file is moved CSV LOGO0001_0000 CSV LOGOO001_0001 Please select dest ination Execute Cancel Target file LOG00001_0001 G1L Do you want to move the fi le Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed 7 Touch and select the file to move 2 Touch the Move button 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When any file
195. e upper left corner is pressed before the display of the Booting message the OS installation function T r A P ee a starts Therefore press the upper left corner after the Booting message is displayed aog KEE CS Ss x Z le Communication setting gt Booting A aa rr GOT setup REE leon EA Time setting amp display 229 E Program data control FAR A Debug amp self check y gee Press the screen upper left corner during Booting message display Language When limiting the display and operation of the utility FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the GT Designers If a user tries to display the main menu of the utility the password input screen is displayed For details on setting passwords refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 7 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of the screen is as follows Title display Close Return button Main Menu Screen 1 Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part N Operation Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Security setting Title display Utility call key Key sensitivi
196. ear Protect Default OK Communication parameter setting by drawing software Select Common Settings Communication Settings from GT Designer3 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When changing the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT L37 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 8 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting E Assign Ethernet I F Several drivers are assigned to the same Ethernet interface However only one GOT IP address is assigned per interface By changing the settings of one interface the GOT IP address GOT port No download default gateway and subnet mask settings of other drivers which are assigned to the same interface are also changed Communication Setting xX 1 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Standard I F Setting Communication Setting ChNo RS422 485 1 MELSEC FX ChNo RS232 9 Host PC ChNo USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection UTILITY FUNCTION 2 E W D z e a og Z 5 Q 2 zZ z 6E wu To Ow Re lt L 24 o 5E OZ Et Assi A ip CH Driver assign OK A 10 z 2 T h the dri display BOX of
197. ecause of PLC run mode was performed O stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or E PROM 411 writeprotected and it is in a protected status O Check the memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protected by keyword O Cancel the key word Remove keyword SA ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC side setting 420 E71 specification is ASCII O Select Binary code 421 E71 is set as read only The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read only Clear setting Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled O er PLC CPU error Communication between PLC CPU and the PLC side Not communicating between l Ethernet module impossible 422 CPU and E71 Confirm CPU O 18 16 error 18 TROUBLESHOOTING Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc Confirm buffer memory 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm Error code 423 424 Error message Insufficient network table information Add station no Same sta on GOT amp project data Review communication parameter Action The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designers Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting
198. eck of files is possible 13 22 SES Downiead Downloads the project data written in the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive to C drive 13 22 Flash Memory n Setup The project data to be displayed can be selected 13 24 S E Upload Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in SD card E 43 25 a FA drive USB drive 25 2 Sew Setup cancel Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed 13 26 2 B29 SONS POINT gt T ogs Notes on operating project data TE When the OS boot drive is set to A Built in SD card deleting copying downloading setting up and uploading 2 RO i g FeZ project data are not available Bee oa E Display operation of Project information Main Menu Program Data control LF 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting 0S information GOT setup tm Alarm information Tine setting amp display lt lt Q T ua 0 O o a SS oO 0 S m ma T gt lt x pe eal naO oye waz mkoko mSS Program data amp ntrol gal Debug amp self cl m Lossing informatio Touch Project information Program data control Project information Project information GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Select drive A Built in SD card gt sa ou 92 C Flash Memory Select a drive and 26 operate project data a D Internal SRAM files au INSTALLATION
199. ect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set do not occur simultaneously 320 Specified object does not existor The part file does not exist x out of range Create the part file and download to GOT The monitored device No is out of the permissible area of the targeted 322 Dedicated device is out of range PLC CPU Confirm device range Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 13 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND coll ESON eee INSPECTION APPENDICES ee Ermes i Bee 7 Error message Action code storage Available memory of the SD card is insufficient Insufficient memory media Confirm the available memory of the SD card 330 capacity The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen x Confirm M card capacity which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The SD card is not installed or in the drive access switch is OFF in drive Memory card not installed or D 331 e Install the SD card in the specified drive x MCARD switched OFF i e Turn ON the access switch Pa SD card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly 332 Memory media is not formatted x Format the SD card 333 Unable to overwrite Memory SD card is write protected x card is write protected Cancel the write protection of SD card 334 Memory media error
200. ed Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Install the standard monitor OS again 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E Font check operation 2 Font check starts by touching Font Check in the Display check screen o The character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font zZ drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen gt 1 Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen N Pa Qa JE Upper left touch Upper right touch 5 a z position position Z325 Aa SES oZo no oO z Ei Sew aoe The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen za 286 lt Aao anz BES Font data B aan FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Al CONTROL GITAR Option fonts L l D 79 a Zz oO 5 ira Ww a To display optional fonts the option font installation is required The option fonts are displayed at the end CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 11 14 2 Self Check 14 2 4 Touch panel check E Touch panel check func
201. ed to 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes Action Error code system alarm O Enabled Example 460 Communication unit error When the system alarm display function can be used take the action for the error code system alarm displayed If the action cannot be taken proceed to 2 b The system alarm display function cannot be O Disabled used Proceed to 2 c b Executing of I O check from the GOT utility Display details Example A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed O Communication error Proceed to 2 c The hardware such as a communication interface O No error has no error Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU c Objects not displayed on the monitor screen Details O Found Example The numerical display object is not O Not found displayed Proceed to 3 Status of the PLC CPU 3 Status of the PLC CPU Phenomenon Cause status a PLC failure Action An error such as CONTROL BUS ERROR or SP UNIT LAY ERROR may have occurred Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault O Occurs always Proceed to the following LF 18 1 The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty Occurrence frequency Example Once a month O Occurs sometimes Error code system alarm Example 1204 CPU H W fault O Operates no
202. ee Communicate with Memory Card gt memory card write E core oS write White Data Project Data OS Special Data Boot OS Destination Memory Card I x ERA GOT Type GT14 Q 320x240 Data can be written into the memory Boot card Project Data Built in Flash Memory OS C Built in Flash Memory FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Write Data Size Project Data Os Capacity of standard monitor OS Special Data TETE Untitled Project1 E F Base Screen Common Settings Total 4702 Kbyte Communication Settings In addition to the above Communication Settings with GOT IP List use Okbyte GOT RAM Standard monitor OS Communication driver Extended function OS Option OS Write Memory Card Information E Data Area 16678840 Kbyte Roe TORE Available space of the SD card or USB memory GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Memory Card Write Close CLEANING DISPLAY ANANDI ONKOL ep SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF 00 1 0M 10 10 KCN 12 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory There are the following two types for the BootOS standard monitor OS installation using the SD card or USB memory 1 Installing when starting the
203. eed to 5 Troubled product investigation Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data If an error occurs again proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation Take the action with referring to GOT installation status check sheet i The GOT is not restored even by performing a to h Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation 4 When powering the GOT ON again OFF ON power OFF the PLC before that 5 Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not improved please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service Depending on the problem details we may ask you to return the troubled product to us In that case please attach the GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system 18 4 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items 1 to 7 When the measure described in the lower column is needed take the measure for the current status When the measure is taken check the result Effective or Ineffective 1 Panel inside wiring The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication O Mixed Current status O Not mixed cable are mixed in the duct Wi
204. eeeeeeeees 11 6 11 8 L Lang ag cercacrcrenn i eavectiaeeeeas 11 1 11 3 Logging information c seceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 53 M MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 0068 17 1 Memory card format 13 63 Memory Check ccccccccceeeeeeeneeeeeseeeneeeeeeenaaees 14 3 Memory information 2 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 65 O Opening screen time eneee eeen 11 1 11 4 OS information c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecteeaeeeeeees 13 5 OS version confirmation ceeeceeeeeeeeees 13 3 P Panel Cutting Dimension s es 6 2 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension 8 14 PARTS NAME 0 cccccccscccceessseeeeeessnteeeeesssteeeeenes 4 1 Back Panel iisas aa 4 2 Front Panel grisienien aiian 4 1 Rear Fate sciinta i aaa aa 4 3 Periodic Inspection eeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 2 Project Information ccceccecseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaes 13 17 Protective Cover for Oill esceeceeeeeeeeeeetees 8 7 Protective Sheet ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 6 R RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter 8 16 S Screen save backlight c ceeees 11 1 11 4 Screen SAVE TIME ee cecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenes 11 1 11 4 SD Car ises sii scsteruvaasddvesviiatadvauvvwdeddtivadadactuusaandatadts 8 1 Security level ChANGE ccccceeeseeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 11 9 Self CHECK oesie a AENA 14 3
205. eeeseceneneesaeeeeeeeeess 8 13 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension ec ceeeeceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeesenaees 8 14 8 10 1 Applicable panel mounted USB port extension ccceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneecaeeeeeeeees 8 14 8 1022 gt PRAMS MAME aiso iccug haaadedraendababcubed dugeohe had E digunedatusecad ied sheladhaphageuasdednuenitatecs 8 14 210 3 Installing HOCEIMA TE EET 8 14 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter ccccceeecceeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeiiaeeeeeneaes 8 16 8 11 1 Applicable RS 232 485 signal conversion adapte ce eccecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneecaeeeeeeeeees 8 16 8 11 2 Installing procedure of RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter c eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 16 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1 Utility EX CUUIOM sds ctaiceesteteascclecaddtceuaace duceeecd can tet ac aceeatc eee E 9 1 9 2 Utility Function Lister eann ee ee eel ela Lec ee E aAa EEE EA 9 2 Tar Utility TBH oaa A a A T ON 9 4 9 3 1 Display operation of main MENU ssssssssssreenstesseertttrrrnnttestretttttttnnnnnsatenttetttnnnn ennnen ennt e nn 9 6 9 3 2 Utility basic conigurato Mso aaea rE EEEE EA EAE KEA AEE NA 9 8 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change esssessiiiseirriirrrrrisiiirieeeiiiinasniiridiannndeiiaanadieiiaadaanaiiia 9 9 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 Communication settihg auru iriiri inttiin
206. efault AT amp FEO CO amp KO amp DOW2S0 1 gt Modemi Gberation Touch the Init button to initialize the modem P Touch the Cut button to disconnect the line 10 10 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting E Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MELSEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the keyword for FX series PLC can be executed Detail setting MELSEC FX UTILITY FUNCTION Transmission Speed BPS Retry O TIMES Timeout Time SEC Delay Time 0 ms Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect 2 ir Se z z SFS EWE Eat Que z Sie 225 SLS OZZL N o z E 1 Regist ata Keyword is registered 26 gt fa 7 Touching the Regist key displays the Registration Selection screen 5 Ho aor For a FX PLC that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input of 2 is displayed Select Keyword or Keyword and Customer keyword When the Enter key is touched the selection is completed and the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed Registration Selection Keyword CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY Keyword and Customer keyword FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Selection Description When Keyword is selected Only keyword can be registered When Keyword
207. efer to the following L7 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive Touching Download button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the download If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown on the left is displayed without starting the download Touching OK button executes an overwrite download to the project data of the same name Touching Cancel button cancels the download When the download is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed Touching OK button restarts the GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 23 13 2 Various Data Control COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL j on nO b Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive Built in SD card to be used in the GOT The GOT monitors using the monitor data in the A drive Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer3 to SD card select A Standard SD Card for Project Data in Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card B Memory Card Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data O Boot OS Destination Memory Card Cc v GOT Type GT14 0 320x240 j Boot Project Data amp Standard SD Card v OS C Built in Flash Memor
208. egister GS262 to 264 For details of the system information and GOT special register refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 2 1 Error contents display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT E Popup displaying the error code and error message Advanced alarm popup display System alarm If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the monitor screen As alarms are popup displayed regardless of the screen type the error occurred will not be overlooked aS A1254 A1254 Bl 349 Bl 348 of DT EE anon fo olkslo of E E Pop up generated alarms regardless of the screen E Displaying error code and error message in a list Advanced system alarm display If error has occurred error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen Multiple errors can be displayed or the history of display can be recorded K Occurred Message Restore Check Pi 04 6 1 10 25 Temp error S oaen 8 05 Fuse error 11 25 10 45 Create a screen to display alarms and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 11 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MA
209. einstalling BootOS 2 Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1 and 2 perform the following 3 Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O The screen is completely white The GOT hardware may be faulty Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation O A line is displayed on the screen O Other faulty displays O The screen freezes 18 2 The GOT hardware may be faulty Example A vertical line is displayed The screen display is not updated and any operation is not allowed 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Proceed to 5 Troubled product investigation Proceed to 1 e Phenomenon Cause status Action e Buzzer sound O Does not sound Buzzer sound O Continues to beep randomly Proceed to 2 Status of the GOT when it Example The rhythm as three beeps one beep and then two beeps is repeated O Continues to beep ina particular pattern freezes The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set turning ON the Buzzer output signal O Beeps continuously 2 Status of the GOT when it freezes screen operation stopped Phenomenon Cause status a Switching to the utility Check the setting of the read device When the Buzzer output signal has no error proce
210. elf check etc For the utility function list refer to the following LS 9 2 Utility Function List 9 1 Utility Execution For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive Flash memory There are following three types for the installing Standard monitor OS methods 1 GT Designer3 GOT USB interface or Ethernet interface or Secs Installed directly from GT Designer3 Installed directly from esigner EEE y 9 eee sie ale ae ae x gt GT Designer BootOS or Standard monitor OS installation SD card 2 GT Designer3 gt or GOT USB memory OS file BootOS or Standard write monitor OS installation gt gt When GOT is remote installed easily using the SD card or USB memory Install the SD SD card or card or USB USB memory 1 memory in GOT SD card 3 GOT gt or GOT USB memory OS file BootOS or Standard upload monitor OS installation eee SD card or Install the SD USB memory 1 card or USB y memory in GOT Install OS from GOT to GOT using SD card or USB memory 4 When installing the BootOS and standard monitor OS standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the installation which uses GT Designer3 refer to the following lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals For the installation which uses GOT refer to the following
211. ems which can be set are described below Touching the each item part makes the respective setting become possible Buzzer volume settin Buzzer volume setting can be changed OE SHORUEONG 7 g 2S5 At factory shipment SHORT ON OFF Window move buzzer volume setting Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window can be selected At factory shipment ON Security level change screen can be displayed Security setting screen change a 11 2 4 Security level change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call key screen change eS 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting The sensitivity of touch panel when GOT screen is touched can be set Key sensitivity setting E g a setting can be changed when double touch is made when touching 1 to8 the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering Touch panel reading error can be corrected Touch panel calibration 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration Set the setting items related with USB mouse keyboard esr et 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard setting Operation setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of buzzer sound and buzzer sound at window move To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 6 11
212. en Advanced Recipe Information screen A dva ne gt d Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Information Storage file folder display screen Advanced Recipe Information l HIGKB 3861584KB WY IF le CS TXT gt 61P G1P gt CSY Create Folder PATT Del Rename Execute 1 Select drive Description The target drive can be selected Even if SD card is not installed this message appears 2 Kind Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 3 a ene 5 Size Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc L77 13 2 5 E Advanced recipe information operation 7 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed Displays the size of the file displayed in Name The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 7 Operation switch 8 Number of files 1 About the displayed file Execution switch of each function Displays the total number of the displayed files The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information scree
213. en Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving 3 POWER LED Q 3 Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Z m Not lit Power is not supplied E pp 2 O 4 Logo label Removable F lt nd S52a lt r F Zz USB interface for communicat th PC Device S40 5 USB interface me Pe ee Device Piste For OS installation project data download and FA transparent DNW USB environmental protection 6 nvironmental protection Opens closes when the USB interface is used cover z fe z z 2 Z Z a z Q H o 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 4 1 Front Panel 4 2 Back Panel 1 4 5 7 8 1 S A XB Battery cover opened i r ae 6 Q t 4 Bos ON 2 SD CARD i 7 14 2 E o lt o g 9 t sD 3 Power supply terminal layout i J 4 d INPUT o 13 ea 24V DC a EATERY E U L HH by UT T T Ba ital HH T O ima T G 4 k amp amp i 4 er LJ bn 4 y LJ os a 12 3 10 15 11 No Name Description 1 RS 232 interface For c
214. en running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a PLC to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem e Remedy 1 Refer to the figures Remedy 1 1 and 1 2 below If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems connect the ground cable to the panel also If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 1 2 Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment Use the thickest cable possible Remedy 1 1 Connection cable Ground cable from N the panel that houses control equipment FG Use the thickest cable possible Panel grounding Remedy 1 2 If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it Remedy 2 Refer to the figures Remedy 2 1 and 2 2 below Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times
215. ension Panel mounted USB port extension compatible with IP67f Serial multi drop connection unit Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Serial multi drop connection uat GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection Connector conversion adapter Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT10 9PT5S Connector conversion adapter For GOT multi drop connection 2 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment Bar code reader RFID controller Sold separately Bar code reader Po Commercially available bar code reader 4 RFID controller Do e Commercially available RFID controller 4 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter Sold separately For GOT multi drop connection multi channel function connection RS 232 485 signal conversion GT14 RS2T4 9P adapter temperature controller connection and MODBUS R RTU connection 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 7 2 2 System Equipment OVERVIEW z O o We Z E STANDARDS AND SYSTEM EMC DIRECTIVE PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 System Equipment 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications Ite
216. eparation of the USB devices removal Touching the Cancel button cancels the preparation of USB devices removal When the preparation of removal is ready the dialog box shown left is displayed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 67 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 10 SRAM control E Function of SRAM control The SRAM user area usage can be confirmed data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the SRAM user area is initialized For the available functions in the SRAM user area refer to the following L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions E Display operation of SRAM control Main menu Program Data control F 9 3 Utility Display Program data control SRAM control SRAM control SRAM contro Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date nad sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 a user alarm 25 0KB 475 0KB mee Backup restoration Initialize selected area Restoration 13 68 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of SRAM control Number 1 2 3 SRAM contro Function name Setting ID Setting name 10 Paar SC ile Initialize all anata eon restora 12 Item Check b
217. er create operation An operation log folder is created Touch the Create Folder button g Information KindNane Size O DIRI GIL L0G00001_0001 2 The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital ER a wiry PERTO ASIF STKIL TALCEN Erter 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Create new folder 4 Touching OK button starts creating folder lt lt Q Ed K 0 e x a a 0 O a a lt gt Jo meka naO aE wW r4 mkoko ra S 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed Process completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 61 13 2 Various Data Control E Precautions 13 62 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in SD card or USB memory f f l 2 characters 1 character Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character eee a Max 78 characters If folder is assigned the h
218. er installing switch the SD card access switch on Powering the GOT on displays the screen on the left To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the SD card Turning the SD card access switch off executes CoreOS installation When the installation is completed the dialog as shown on the left is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off Remove the SD card after powering the GOT off Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown on the left The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment Install OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download project data as required 16 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed zZ O When the CoreOS cannot be installed confirm the following item 9 If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item the error may be caused by a hardware failure 2 Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative z 3 Error Action 1 Check whether the SD card access switch of the GOT is on If the switch is off switch it on g The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the SD ih cae aeons on A 2 The writing from the GT Designer3 to the SD card may not have been E card in the GOT Qa completed normally z e Execute the writing from the
219. erating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared Operating hours 1 To display correct time Set the clock of GOT gt gt 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time 2 Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 14 22 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 4 GOT start time 15 CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION Zz CLEAN H 5 Zz m z In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent g z BES Ea Precautions for cleaning Bs i gt Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they m
220. eration e action setting settings are out of range or invalid Set valid values 370 Upper and lower limit value error The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit y Confirm value setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit amp inequalityLEM Lower limit A A Available memory of the USB memory is insufficient Insufficient USB drive capacity f 380 l Confirm the available memory of the USB memory and increase the x Confirm the drive capacity ea memory if it is low 381 USB drive is not installed orina If the USB memory is not installed install it z removable state If the USB memory is ready to be removed install it again ao Memory card is not formatted or in a format not conformed by a GOT 382 USB drive is not formatted x Reformat the USB memory 383 Unable to overwrite USB drive is USB memory is write protected R write protected Cancel the write protection of USB memory 384 USB drive error Replace USB USB memory is faulty x drive Replace the USB memory 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 15 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm MAINTENANCE AND coll ESOO eeo INSPECTION APPENDICES ee Ermes i ee z Error message Action code storage The time out error occurred during communicating Confirm the cable omission and status of the PLC Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the SER case an error occurs when using the multi channel fun
221. erial SIRIN matena Visual check No foreign matter sticking attachment Not outstanding Replace with new one Remove clean For the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure refer to the following L gt 8 4 Protective Sheet 17 2 Periodic Inspection E Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Ambient Display section 0 to 50 C t ti i emperalure Make measurement with thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C Surrounding hygrometer environment Measure corrosive gas 10 to 90 RH Ambient humidity Atmosphere 24VDC Measure voltage S 2 Power supply voltage check See ree ones 20 4 to 26 4VDC terminals No corrosive gas Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Mounting Action For use in control panel temperature inside control panel is ambient temperature Change supply power Retighten screws Foreign material status Visual check No foreign matter sticking attachment Loose terminal Retighten screws with screwdriver Not loose Visual check Proper intervals terminals Loose Eo Visual check Not loose connectors Check GOT internal battery voltage 5 Battery status in Time Setting amp Display of the Utility 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1
222. erical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Communicatior x Standard I F Setting ChNo RS422 485 Cursor MELSEC FX ChNo RS232 9 Host PC ChNo USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None SjelIeJo del Ja SH erel Frier Keyboard Input numeric with keyboard 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric e Enter Key Completes numeric input and closes the keyboard Cancel Key Cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard gt lt gt Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor e Del Key Del key is used when canceling the input by 1 character key and the key which is not mentioned do not function Touching Enter key completes numeric input and closes keyboard 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING In Communication Setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in Communication Detail setting the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting The setting contents of the communication interface can be checked or changed 10 1 Communication Setting Whether to supply 5V power or not can be set 10 1 Eth
223. ernet setting The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the host can be changed 10 15 10 1 Communication setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions Function Description Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name of the device connected using the Assign Eth t I F ssign Etherne Ethernet interface Channel No Ch No setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Standard interface Communication parameters setting Set communication parameters of communication devices Set whether to supply 5V power or not when the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor is used 5V power supply 10 1 2 Display operation of Communication Setting Main menu Communication setting S 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Rication setting ioe Xt Touch 3 wy Comm setting Communication setting Communication setting Communication Setting x Standard I F Setting RS422 485 MELSEC FX RS232 Mul tidrop slave USB Host PC Ethernet Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection Mid yp river assign OK 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 10 1 Communication setting UTILITY FUNCTION 2 im Qa See SFO EWE Eat Que 5n 25 BES
224. ery periodically For the replacement procedure refer to the following 8 3 Battery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system alarm For details of the battery status display by the utility screen refer to the following L gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the message in the system alarm set Battery alarm display to on 11 1 1 Function of Display System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low For details of the system alarm display refer to the following _ GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for about one month after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that If it exceeds a month from the voltage low detection to battery replacement the clock data or D drive Internal SRAM data may become indefinite Adjust the clock and format the D drive Internal SRAM 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX
225. es into the GOT Z z BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of it is o o unnecessary Z 3 This chapter explains the installation using GOT ss oz GT Designer3 gt SD card gt GOT USB memory BootOS or Write standard monitor OS o gt file N installation When GOT is remote installed g saaa easily using the CF card E iia USB memory aoe install the SD 26 gt SD card USB memory 1 card in GOT z lt D GT coe ate oag aL ae The GOT can starts without an oe OS installed za Writ Install the SD o5 2 SS Ale SD card Ge in GOT 255 lt L Set the OS boot z Q drive to A Standard ne E SD Card x To SES GOT gt SD card gt GOT Bae USB memory BootOS or OS file standard monitor OS gt Install OS from GOT to GOT using CF card USB memory N ere Install the SD SD card USB memory card USB T memory in GO FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 4 When execute installation with USB memory standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For the writing of OS in GT Designer3 refer to the following L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals CoreOS In 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following L gt 16 5 CoreOS GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY ANIAN OVON LR ep SEC
226. et when connecting to a controller 8 Set when connecting with a bar code reader or RFID g t Set when connecting with PC drawing software Set when using the function that uses the gateway function when connection types except the Ethernet connection is used for connecting to controllers Ethernet download function e Fixed to 9 for the USB interface 4 Cannot be assigned with Ethernet I F Assignment Driver display BOX The name of communication driver assigned to the channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of drawing software is displayed For details of drivers to be displayed refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Displays None in the driver display BOX in case of the following The communication driver is not installed lt gt 13 2 1 OS information e In channel number specification menu BOX 0 is set When the channel number is set to 9 to RS 232 interface the communication driver Host PC or Host model can be selected When the channel number is set to 9 to USB interface the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned Assign Ethernet I F The communication settings for the Ethernet connection can be made Only Ethernet interface built in model can display this button Ethernet I F Assignment can assign up to two channels per interface lt gt 10 1 4 ll Assign Ethernet I F operation 5V power supply
227. etails on FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword refer to the manual of the PLC used 2 Registration conclition Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC used 3 When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displayed When the customer keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed To set the customer keyword 8 digits from O to 9 or A to F must be used Please input Customer keyword m 2nd M MESKER 4 5 6 C 0 o gt EIA A Del Ent 10 12 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 1 Selection of keyword protection level For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC 3 levels of protection can be set When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed set the keyword taking the following into consideration UTILITY FUNCTION a When only keyword is registered Protection level is selected by the head character of keyword All operation prohibition Set the keyword starting with one of A D to F or 0 to 9 Read incorrect write protection Set the keyword starting with B Erroneous write prohibition Set the keyword starting with
228. eyboard setting 11 8 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 4 Security level change Zz O E Security level change functions S Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch R To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 Security level setting Password setting C gt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E POINT 25 Restrictions on screen display Z g The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT age Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT Te 828 E Display operation of Security level change Main menu GOT setup Operation gt 9 3 Utility Display 7 0 z F o z O x oe Wi a e aes zz5 Toz gt E u TIN ra 8S fe aQ a0og Bi SHORT Window move buzzer ON Secur ig setting Setting Ka X Touch Touch caiet GOT setup Operation se msr Security setting BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND Security level change Touch Security level change FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Input the password of the security level which is set in Drawing software GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK
229. f Displaysstet i idseidehlinhiinelathdiiwiiia EE 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of Display ccccccccececceeeeeeeeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseceaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseetennsenaeees 11 2 11 1 3 Display operations ese eileen anes ane el nel eae 11 3 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaes 11 6 11 2 1 Operation setting fUNCtIONS earan iE a R RE evecddaacendadesbetensdadapes cveddebeeesdes 11 6 11 2 2 Display operation of Operation ccccccccececceeeceeeeeececneceeeeeeeeeeesecsecaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeetteetenneenaeees 11 7 11 2 3 Setting operation of Operation ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeesessececcceeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeteneeenaeees 11 8 Tt2 4 Security level change sinnene ropi EAA ae eae aie aie 11 9 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting oisinn iil eden reeds ede elle evita lees 11 11 11 2 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration 0 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 13 11 2 7 USB mouse keyboard Setting ce ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeseeaaeees 11 15 Tiko Transparent Mode Setting cc is icccesscecccceeseeccdeeeehdactenedeessdecech eas sideesladctenadhdienedhcbvesccedee slash ehieencs 11 17 11 4 Backup Restoration Setting neson aA a TA E R a 11 18 TES Behavior of Duplicate IPS a a aaaea aa aae aaa aia OA 11 21 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY
230. f advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file Also the process to create the first file may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file Reference value Direct connection to QCPU and CPU device point 32767 points setting transmission speed 115200bps e When the block setting number to 1 about 17 seconds e When the block setting number to 2048 about 4 minutes c For executing the saving loading of device value with advanced recipe file which has been moved or whose name has been changed Adjust Recipe File setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designers to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed After the setting has been changed download the advanced recipe setting to GOT 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 6 Logging information Zz o i E Function of logging information O Logging files created with the logging function can be copied deleted or renamed etc fra Without using a PC you can manage logging files on the GOT Z 5 For details of the logging function refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Function Description Reference z 20 Displaying file folder data 13 54 13 55 Z f Tog G1L CSV conversion 13 56 S as Sie G1L TXT conversion G1L file
231. fter the GOT is turned on a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed After the dialog box is displayed touch the OK button to display the main menu x GOT power on 2 Communication setting i re GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check Touch the OK button Language 2 When touching menu call key Touching the menu call key while user created screen is displayed displays the main menu The menu call key is set in the position on the GOT screen upper left corner at factory shipment Horizontal display Length display Menu x Communication setting i re GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check 7 Li anguage C m gt j The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or GT Designer3 For menu call key setting refer to the following L3 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting e GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses Do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 Pressing time of the utility ca
232. g ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously at ON OFF Screen save backlight i the start of the screen save function can be specified At factory shipment OFF Z Mi iiz l Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the GOT ON OFF ac Battery alarm display 5 QW internal battery has dropped can be specified At factory shipment OFF a d The brightness can be adjusted 2 z Bright trast 22 a E a L3 Brightness contrast 35 mT Invert colors For the user created screen and the utility screen whether to ON OFF On only GT1450 Q invert the displayed colors can be specified At factory shipment OFF m4 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Setting 0 does not hide the title screen The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data contents INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 11 1 Display Setting 1 Display setting by GT Designer3 Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings of opening screen time screen save time and screen save backlight To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the disp
233. g function O Touch panel reading error can be corrected re Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses E When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function g Before adjustment After adjustment a E N f zoa fe Z Q 2 Run fee Run Stop Shs 4 gt 828 The Run will operate though you The Stop button can be touched intended to touch the Stop button without fail N 0 z F o z O E S o Wi a e ao Lu N E Q DISPLAY AND E Display operation of Touch panel calibration Main menu GOT setup Operation 9 3 Utility Display SHORT Window move buzzer oN Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max Key reaction speed Standar o 0 ouchgpane calibration Setting BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND GOT setup Operation Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touch panel calibration GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND
234. he control panel for conduction Installation within a control panel greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the serial multi drop connection unit 8 OPTION 8 13 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING Zz 2 Q 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S panel mounted USB port extension is a waterproof extension cable of the USB It is used to pull out the USB interface host on the back of GT14 to the surface of the control panel 8 10 1 Applicable panel mounted USB port extension The following panel mounted USB port extension is applicable for GT14 Model name Description GT14 C10EXUSB 4S Panel mounted USB port extension 8 10 2 Parts name The following shows the parts name of panel mounted USB port extension Cap installation chart Waterproof cap im a o MER gt l Oz o al f Ferrite core Cable USB plug Model name label Seal T 8 10 3 Installing procedure E installed to panel Install the panel mounted USB port extension as follows with attention to a curve or a distortion of waterproof cap seal and nut
235. he dialog box shown at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again gt 13 2 6 m Precautions When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 5 Copy operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied Advanced Recipe Information DIRT a GIP ARPOOO1 1K E 16KB 386 1584KB IFile pe Information Please select destination Target file ARPOOO1 G1P Do you want to copy the fi le Target file ARPOOO1 G1P Do you want to overwrite the fi le Process completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touch and select the file to copy 2 Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders Touching Execute button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the copy When the copy
236. he specified torque range then install it to the GOT Tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Not doing so may cause a damage or a drop Specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m Mounting screw M3 x 6 pan head screw M3 x 6 pan head screw Precautions when the USB environmental protection cover is opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is opened 8 OPTION 8 9 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION e e WIRING Zz 2 Q 12 8 7 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 7 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT14 Product name Model name Description Stand GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 for GOT1000 series 8 7 2 Installing procedure Adjust to 7 Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle 45 55 65 or 75 adjusting fitting of the stand Angle adjusting fitting 2 Put the GOT into the stand from the stand front side and fix it using the mounting fixtures For how to mount the GOT refer to the following L7 6 5 Installation Procedure For a detail of the stand refer to the following L gt GOT1000 STAND User s Manual GOT mounting face 8 10 8 OPTION 8 7 Stand
237. horizontal screen that cannot be edited Installing the BootOS or Standard monitor OS in the GOT from drawing software the utility screen is displayed w The utility screen has options for Brightness contrast Memory check etc N H For details refer to the following x ox L7 9 to 18 STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 1 1 Features Monitoring for turning ON OFF bit devices of a PLC forced turning ON OFF the bit devices of a PLC monitoring the word device set value current value and changing that numeric values are easily made 1 The display unit is used for engineers stage replacement setting change and troubleshooting or for operation guidance to an operator e Monitor e Forced turning ON OFF e Set value change e Trouble check Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e Multiple languages are displayed using the Unicode2 1 compatible fonts and beautiful characters are drawn using the TrueType and high quality fonts e Two types of display modes are provided 65536 color display and monochrome display A fine and beautiful full color display which shows even small characters clearly is enabled in the 65536 color display by adopting the high intensity wide viewing angle and high definition TFT color liquid crystal display Also compatible with digital screen displays with 65536 colors BMP etc In the monochrome display
238. iCareix ccs ceth oi eee n aaea a a a a a See lle a aed 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable SD Gard inesi ate eee at e ae eect ae vee ened ey 8 1 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD Card cccceceeeeecneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeentnaeeaeeeeeees 8 1 8 2 USBiMGMONy dsi er EEEE EEEE AEE oreeendtun 8 3 8 2 1 Applicable USB MEMON aissar a a a aa e eaaa a a aeaaeae 8 3 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory s ssssesisssesrrssserrressrerrrssrerrrssreeens 8 3 3 3 BAINO ra E T E E A deltas 8 4 8 3 1 Applicable pa E a a a aaa a a E a aa 8 4 8 3 2 Battery Specifications lt ci4 nnctsicndeie iden Mri din nade RAAE 8 4 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure ccccecececeececeeeneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeneaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeetesesinaeeaeeeeeess 8 5 8 4 Protective Sheet EE EPA E EA TETEA Bee canine Ms ita a oe ae a ceed ota a aes eae ahaa te 8 6 8 4 1 Applicable protective SHE eiai e ede geieeadadsneasaaddadeatbadd e ae a a a a 8 6 3 4 2 Installing ProcedUre asyarstn ieii eE AREA A A AE ng EEA A E agentes 8 6 8 9 Protective Cover for Oil caneri a a a a i 2 8 7 8 5 1 Applicable protective cover for Oil cccceceeeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesececnceeaeeeeeess 8 7 852 INStallING procedure riietas ernes EEE EE EE A EAE EN 8 7 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover cc ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeecncaeeeeeeeeeeeeesnccnaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesnnaeees 8 9 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental prote
239. ially the response time of a STN liquid crystal display is slower in the lower temperature due to its characteristic Please use the display after checking the response time Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature When the same screen is displayed for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage and it may not disappear To prevent the heat damage the screen saver function is effective For details on the screen saver function refer to the following 11 1 Display Setting 2 Gradation inversion is a characteristic of liquid crystal display panel Please be forewarned that depending on the displayed color the visualization may be difficult even within the described view angle 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life 11 1 Display Setting 4 The touch panel is analog resistive film type If you touch the panel simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the panel in 2 points or more simultaneously Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section An analog resistive film
240. ic 05 27 61 3K 59 For details of the screen display operation refer to the following ai s z nD lt 13 2 1 OS information ae O25 POINT SUN an ae Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face OF ZO A MITSUBISHI A MITSUBISHI When the Boot OS version is 2 digits Z T GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL only the lower digit is printed on mooeL GT1455 QTBDE mooeL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX Example H W version H SIN 1160003 4A T SIN 1160003 HD on Y OS version AD AA HD L2 MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 Se MAC ADD 12 34 56 78 90 12 ca al O O MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION 7 BootOS Rating plate HD 5 5 g MADE IN JAPAN Version MADE IN JAPAN Version Q Oo ts IS cu BSS Eog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 3 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred the transferred project data size the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer3 For details refer to the following L gt GT Designer3
241. ierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b c Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX CON e NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name shown below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in SD card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 2 Precautions for operation a b Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder
242. ion The device value of selected record is deleted without value and changed to record only for reading The record name is not deleted Advanced Recipe Information GIP ARPOOO1 H16KB 386 1584kB GIPSCSV GIP TXT File Name A JUU GIP Setting No 2 Name product2 Bo 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Load record GOT PLC Save record Match recordsDelete Device PLC GOT GOTSPLC Value Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Are you sure you want to delete Process completed 7 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to be deleted If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted Touching the Delete Device Value button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing screen message is displayed on the When deleting is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Precautions O 1 When creating folder file 5 Z a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file m GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters
243. ion can be edited Operator information edit bd Item Operator Name Level Password o Wake a permanent password e E Use ext auth ID f tanb O Jo OperatorName OPOOO4 a Operator ID OK Cance Description The operator name to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Up to 16 alphanumeric characters The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added b Operator ID b porao Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 c Level The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be added 0 to 15 d Password Input a password Up to 16 alphanumeric characters f Make a permanent password Use ext auth ID Switches the setting of the item disabled and enabled L Disabled V Enabled Switches whether to use the external authentication ID Not Used V Used 9 Ext auth ID The external authentication ID is displayed or input an external authentication ID External authentication ID setting range alphanumerics 4 to 32 digits LF E Function setting 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 4 Operator management operation Operator setting menu E Operator management i J Password change it E Function setting Administrator OPO001
244. is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in SD card or USB memory by using personal computer etc GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 51 13 2 Various Data Control 2 13 52 a b Precautions for operation Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the SD card while the Processing message is on the screen after SD card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the recipe is executed while the GOT is in access to other file SD card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the Advanced Recipe after the processing for other file has completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen Estimation of processing time The process may take time depending on the setting o
245. itial menu Execute now 5 9 2 0 Touch to input password and touch Enter key Touching Enter key executes read write check for the built in flash memory which is completed in Please input password around 10 seconds oae Hole HBE 0 A Del Enter 14 4 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check Since the above page was created for explanation purpose it differs from the actual page 1 OVERVIEW a E About GOT amp A GOT is installed on the panel surface of a control panel or operating z panel and connects to the PLC within the control panel The GOT carries PLC out switch operation lamp display data display message display etc Z Connector for E For the display screen two kinds of screens are available user screen program z and utility screen 2 3 eL 1 User Screen 0S The user screen is a screen drawn by drawing software oe The objects Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be arbitrarily arranged on the display GOT Moreover multiple screens created within drawing software can be z individually selected or overlapped for the display z o iL For details refer to the following O oO 3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 2 2 Utility Screen The utility screen is a factory drawn
246. l ChNo Ethernet input is displayed None Host PC Keyboard 3 Input the channel number from the keyboard and Communication Setting touch Enter key and the value is defined Rsd22 46 Simultaneously the name of the communication driver corresponding to the channel number Host PC assigned by drawing software is displayed in the USB f Host PC driver display BOX Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection Assign i Ethernet I F CH Driver assign OK Standard I F Setting ChNo E Communication detail setting switching operation If the driver display BOX is touched on the communication setting screen or Ethernet I F assign screen the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device C 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 5 10 1 Communication setting UTILITY FUNCTION 2 ir Qa 4 6ES EWE Eat Que FE re sao Ooz OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 10 6 E Assign Ethernet I F operation The following
247. l dimensions W164 6 46 x H135 5 32 x D55 2 17 mm inch Weight Compatible software package GT Designer3 version Approx 0 7kg Excluding mounting fixtures Version1 37P or later 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Performance Specifications 4 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them A crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems like it has changed Please note that it appears due to its characteristic Espec
248. lable is displayed on the tab of the channel whose setting is changed 2 Ethernet setting item The contents of the Ethernet setting configured in drawing software are displayed The setting of the host station can be changed L gt E Change of host 3 Restore default settings Touching this button cancels the change of the setting and returns the setting to the status when the project data was written 1 How to cancel the change of the setting in the Ethernet setting screen Cancel the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen with the Restore default settings button The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the Restore default settings button The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written project data If the written project data does not have a channel with same Ethernet settings as that of the channel changed in Ethernet setting screen the changed settings are not reflected 2 Range where the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are reflected The settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are valid in the GOT On the other hand they are not overwritten to the project data written to the GOT The changed settings are not reflected to the project data which is read fr
249. lation hole for the main unit POWER SD 2 LED RD ERROR 3 Terminating resistor selector switch Lit or blinking depending on the status Can be selected among 110 OPEN and 330 set to OPEN by default 4 Connector for the PLC communication Connector selection switch for the PLC 5 tes communication 6 USB port D Sub 9pin Male for RS 232 connection Switch for selecting RS 422 or RS 232 set to RS 422 by default For connecting a PC for changing the communication driver 7 Connector for the PLC communication 8 Protective cover D Sub 9pin Female for RS 422 connection Protects unused D sub connector USB port and switches Terminal block for the serial multi drop 9 ee communication 10 Power supply connector Terminal block 5 pin with a protective cover M3 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6Nem 24VDC power supply connector insertion point A dedicated cable is included 11 Slider for installing the DIN rail Mode selection switch 12 Slide switch Do not operate Set to right by default When set to left the module does not operate normally 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive Please use the serial multi drop connection unit while installed in conductive shielded control panels Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control panels Please secure the control panel lid to t
250. lay setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Screen save time Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 Screen save backlight When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When Screen save backlight is set to OFF the above signal has no effect on the screen save backlight GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 1 2 Display operation of Display Main menu GOT setup Display GOT setup Display Display x Language Opening screen time Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display aC Touch an item to Brightness contrast Setting change settings 11 2 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 Display Setting 11 1 3 Display operations z O H E Language S 1 Touching the setting items displays the Select re Language Japanese Language screen E Opening screen time 5 Sec E Sc
251. le processing Core OS write Otherwise the GOT will be beyond re SETE LEE ETET ERORA Fa te ne of proomsstre Ore OS twit Boot OS write is simultaneously processed alone with the processing of Core OS write Memory Gard Write lose CoreOS Install its ap ell a ine Corel tH orel Nas E ie oe A Ver 05 27 00 AM ZEAR f PREE SDA FYPRAATYy aoe ee OR Pat 4 A EREL ELARA oge Dh Bihor Do you the Core0S installation The internal memory is initialized and raam to the state before factory shipment Turn ay the SD card access switch before installatio If you do not install the CoreOS turn oft the GOT and remove a SD card CoreOS Install Ver 05 27 00 AM He BRE MOT EEN Warnin Us hRSVEREBUIT ESO amp Do not turn off the power supply Do not push the reset button Sevaed Writing data Phase Progress CoreOS Install Ver 05 27 00 AM BT LEI cine YJ DH PEROT SEE Installation is completed Turn off GOT and remove SD card Phase Progress BSE VAR IVLTK BSL Please install the Standard 0S ARREKO Boot0S Version 05 27 00 AM 16 12 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 CoreOS 4 Write the CoreOS from GT Designer3 to the SD card For details of GT Designer3 operation refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the SD card in the GOT Aft
252. led Connection cable Fig C Ground cable L Ferrite core Use a short and Ground to thick wire as y the panel Attaching the ferrite core to the ground possible cable connected to the panel having 7 the GOT as shown in Fig C reduces the influence of noise When wiring as shown in Fig C is Connection difficult perform wiring as shown in cable Fig D Fig D Ground cable zZ Ferrite core Ground to q the panel 18 8 18 TROUBLESHOOTING O Effective O Ineffective 7 Power supply system Main power pie power aoc Oo Oo Oo oO RoT The power from the same system is used Curtentsiatis I O power for the GOT I O equipment such as O Used 2 VO equipment relay and power equipment such as O Not Not used Main circuit power servo amplifier m o Power O equipment o 2 fo Main power E Isolation transformer z power A AC200V PLC Connecting an isolation transformer as Ww M for th o o 3 _ i E ie ja ch l GOT well as separating the wiring of the GOT O Effective m i ne from th 1 0 power power from that of the power of the 1 0 i E Eni a o O equipment and power equipment reduces H Ineffective ee en ar Main circuit power equipment the influence of noise o Power equipment 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 9 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet E System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit module name 1 System configur
253. led circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND Al CONTROL To Pattern 1 of c Move check among screen L oad D 7 a Zz oO faa Ww a CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS INSTALLATION OF AND STANDARD 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 7 14 2 Self Check c Move check among screens e Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 1 e Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal ro Faem Pattern 2 14 8 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check e Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlapped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed z If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal A To Fatema g o5 25s 3 z Ei gt E w e Pattern 4 Shape check TI The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals aoc If the shape and interval are displayed visually in order it is normal Touching the upper right part of the screen returns to the Display check screen z3 SESE SOSSSE SS ESS SSE SSS ane 069080099 000080060 pie acs H OOCOOOCOOCOOGOOLOLLOO H
254. les are unmatched with the settings for job files x Confirm job setting Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen e Insert a SD card or USB memory Cannot access Logging Files 612 Turn on the SD card access switch x Check the memory card If the SD card or USB memory have unnecessary files delete the files e Insert a SD card or USB memory 613 Error in writing logfile e Turn on the SD card access switch x e Check if the SD card or USB memory is writable e Insert a SD card or USB memory 614 Error in reading logfile Turn on the SD card access switch x e Check if the SD card or USB memory is readable The server does not work normally or the connection path to the server is 615 Cannot connect to MES Server made up incorrectly x Check the Server e Check the operating conditions of the server e Check the network to the server The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP 616 Cannot connect to SNTP Server server is made up incorrectly x Check the Server e Check the operating conditions of the STNP server e Check the network to the SNTP server Reconfigure the GOT FTP client setting 640 An error occurred in a FTP client Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server process For the error details check the GOT special register GS989 FTP communication error notification 800 Abnormal module status Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applica
255. ll key When having set Pressing time of the menu call key setting screen to other than 0 s keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to Pressing time or more before leaving the finger from the touch panel For menu call key setting refer to the following lt 3 11 2 5 Utility Call Key Setting 3 When the utility call key is set to the zero point Even when the utility call key is set to the zero point you can display the main menu using either of the following two operations e Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen Keeping pressing the upper left corner while the Booting message is displayed after powering up 9 6 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 3 When touching special function switch utility Touching the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed displays the main menu The special function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by GT Designer3 Z O E O Z 5 Le m gt g of JE Special function switch f a S Utility Language FE 528 For the details of the special function switch refer to the following K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 2 z 4 When powering ON the system E The Booting message is displayed after powering up After that keep pressing the upper left corner to display 2z T the main menu SE If th
256. lt 3 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1 9 1 Utility Execution Zz O O L E COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Communication setting GOT setup Item Communication setting Functions overview Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces Setting communication parameters Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU Setting whether to supply 5V power or not 12 Reference 10 10 Ethernet setting Display Operation Transparent mode Backup restoration Di isplaying the contents of Ethernet setting changing the host Switching message languages Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF Adjusting brightness and contrast Inverting colors
257. lue Touching this button displays a keyboard on the GOT screen lt 8 oES For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page aa c Move to another setting screen Touching this button moves to another setting screen For the setting method of each setting item refer to the setting operation of each setting screen 2 OK button Cancel button x Close Return button FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA Reflect or cancel the changed settings a ao a OK button z Touching this button reflects the changed settings 2 b Cancel button Touching this button cancels the changed settings and return to the previous screen om c x Close Return button wi Touching this button closes the screen Depending on the setting item the GOT restarts Z If x button is touched without touching OK button the following dialog box will be displayed mie Z If the settings are not changed the dialog box is not displayed 5a i Operate following the message of the dialog box O86 gt With do not push OK button as if you close the screen the changed n 4 value will be canceled a5 OK oe Zo ie On INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 9 9 3 Utility Display E Keyboard operation I 2 9 10 Touch the numerical value to be changed Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position changes by the position of num
258. ly to the USB port of the GOT Since the USB plug part may be inserted loosely or unplugged by power of vibrations impacts or pulling fix the cable to the structures inside the panel or the preventive hole from removing for the USB cable of the GOT main unit by using the banding band or others 80 3 15 or more a Use the product after checking that the functions and performances operate correctly 8 OPTION 8 15 8 10 Panel Mounted USB Port Extension OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PARTS NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION ee WIRING Zz 2 Q 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P type RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor enables conversion of RS 232 communication interface to RS 485 communication interface For the wiring between the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 8 11 1 Applicable RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter The following RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor is applicable Model name Contents For GOT multi drop connection multi channel function connection GT14 RS2T4 9P temperature controller connection a
259. m Specifications Display section 0 to 50 C Operating ambient Other than temperature display section 0 to 55 C when horizontally installed 0 to 50 C when vertically installed Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity Storage ambient humidity Vibration resistance 20 to 60 C 10 to 90 non condensing WBT 39 C 10 to 90 non condensing Half Frequency Acceleration Sweep count amplitude Under 5 to 8 4Hz 3 5mm 10 times each in Conforms to intermittent X Y and Z JIS B 3502 and 8 4 to 150Hz 9 8m s2 vibration directions IEC 61131 2 Under 5 to 8 4Hz 1 75mm continuous f 8 4 to 150Hz 4 9m s2 z vibration Shock resistance Conforms to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Operating atmosphere Must be free of lamp black corrosive gas flammable gas or excessive amount of electro conductive dust particles and must be no direct sunlight Same as for saving Operating altitude 1 2000 m 6562 ft max Installation location Overvoltage category Pollution degree 3 Cooling method Grounding Inside control panel ll or less 2 or less Self cooling Class D grounding 100 or less to be connected to the panel when grounding is not possible 4 Do not use or store the GOT under pressures higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe this i
260. mation Target file LOGOO001_0001 G1L Are you sure do you want to delete Process completed Cannot delete Source file exist in folder 1 Touch and select the file folder to delete Touching Del button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog When it cannot be deleted the dialog box shown at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again L gt 13 2 6 m Precautions 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 57 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z Ss a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO 13 58 4 Copy operation Folder to be used in logging is copied _ogging Information Ki ndName DIRI GIL LOG00001_0001 p 60KB 3862528KB BILCSY GILS TXT CSV LOGO0001_0000 CSV LOGO0001_0001 b40KB 386 1584kB SFi lel Please select destination Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to copy the fi le Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed 7 Touch and select the fil
261. me data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 6 13 7 Install All OS files written in the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive can be installed in the C 13 8 drive Built in flash memory Upload All OS files in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in SD card 13 9 p E drive USB drive Property display Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date of the file 13 10 Data check Data check of files is possible 13 10 1 Notes on installing OS If the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS is installed such data on the GOT as the project data will be deleted After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download necessary data 2 Notes on handling OS files When the OS boot drive is set to A Built in SD card installing and uploading OS files are not available E Display operation of OS information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display GOT setup Tine setting amp display Program data cont ral Debug amp self c Program data control OS information OS information Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate BootOS D Internal SRAM and OS files 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 5 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING OPERATION SET
262. ment range 2 3 Radiated noise product are measured 230M 1000MHz QP 37dB LV m 30m in measurement range 3 EN61000 4 2 Immunity test in which static electricity is 4kV Contact discharge Electrostatic immunity applied to the cabinet of the equipment 8kV Aerial discharge 80 1000MHz 10V m Immunity test in which field is irradiated 1 4 2GHz 3V m to the product 2 0 2 7GHz 1V m 80 AM modulation 1kHz EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation Power line 2kV EN61131 2 Immunity test in which burst noise is EN61000 4 4 y Digital 1 0 24V or higher 1kV 2007 4 applied to the power line and signal nee Fast transient burst noise ines Digital 1 O 24V or less gt 250V f Analog I O signal lines gt 250V Power line between line and ground 0 5kV EN61000 4 5 Immunity test in which lightening surge g pE F k Power line between lines 0 5kV Surge immunity is applied to the product Data communication port 1kV EN61000 4 6 Immunity test in which a noise inducted Power line 10V Conducted RF immunity on the power and signal lines is applied Data communication port 10V Test for checking normal operations EN61000 4 8 f under the circumstance exposed to the Power supply frequency on 30 A m A ferromagnetic field noise of the power magnetic field immunity supply frequency 50 60Hz 4 The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be in
263. minal 6 2mm TOP P yo J J or less Faan 3 2 a o 6 2mm SP 7 or less When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to one terminal one terminal Cable size For power supply 0 75mm2 or more For grounding 2mm or more Solderless terminal M3 solderless terminal applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 8N m 7 1 3 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential difference and noise interference which may result in GOT malfunctions These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures E Wiring path of the GOT s ground cable and power line Bundling the GOT s ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise which may result in malfunctions Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference Powersupply for power equipment Power supply for power equipment Good Wiring the ground cable away from the Bad Bundling the ground cable and power cable the power cable 7 WIRING 7 3 7 1 Power Supply Wiring UL cUL SYSTEM STANDARDS AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION E Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded Wh
264. n 2 Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following _ 13 1 4 Display file 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 35 13 2 Various Data Control z O H S Z 5 mg 3 E 2B zeZz ene Eos Sus 223 2u5 Sr2 BESO Szo n 0 zZ z aa Z62 Oo gt F iu 558 Ba SOS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY lt E lt Q T 0 0 oO S ss oO 0 S m SS lt L eine yee ase waz mkoko LOO DEBUG AND SELF GOT SELF CHECK CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 36 2 Advanced recipe record list screen Touching the Execute button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the advanced recipe file this screen appears Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved loaded Advanced Recipe Record List File Name A JJJU GIP Setting No 2 Name product2 No AttrRecord Comment _ _ lal Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT FPLC PLC gt 60T GOTSPLC Value Number Item Description 1 No Record No of advanced recipe file is displayed Attribution of record is displayed Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer3 2 Attr V Record can be loaded saved Record whose val
265. n The same clearances must be maintained when rotating the GOT 90 degrees clockwise for a vertical installation Installation Environment In the presence of radiated noise or heat generating equipment nearby 100mm or more 20mm or more In the absence of radiated noise or heat generating equipment nearby rA Vertical Format 50 mm 1 97 or more 2 Vertical Format 80 mm 3 14 or more al MITSUBISHI conoc Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch gt lt _ 6 2 6 INSTALLATION 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar fixture set the GOT display section as shown below Lu E Horizontal installation ee gt When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to e 105 degrees GOT back panel O H 0 GOT E m display 20 section Be Control panel etc g The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C 3 O W D E Vertical installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 50 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT u back panel z 2 a GOT display section 9 W Control panel Z etc as X The G
266. n targeted file is specified correctly Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL When the deletion completes the dialog box shown left is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 19 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Copy operation Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in SD card E drive USB drive e Copying to another directory in the same drive Copying between A drive and E drive Copy to from C drive or copy to C drive D drive is disabled This item explains using the A drive Install SD card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination Set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designers for the folder name L gt GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Install the SD card mentioned above to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following L gt 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 3 Open Project Information screen to select the file to copy Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder 4 Touching Copy button displays the message l _ Please select a destination in the left bottom of the Project information screen Select drive 5 Ifthe copy destination
267. n the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete project data PROJECT 1 Do you want to delete Delete is completed Touch and select the file to delete 2 Touching Delete button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion A When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 15 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro i O oa ca Q 8 FILE DISPLAY AND 4 Copy operation Copies the selected file Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive Alarm information Belect drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select a_destination The target file to copy AAMOOOO1 G1A Do you want to copy the fi le ox The file of the same name already exists Copy is completed Touch and select the file to copy
268. nagement Enables adding editing deleting importing and exporting the operator information 13 74 13 77 Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT 13 78 Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT 13 80 Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT 13 81 Undo Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one 13 82 Import operation Imports the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT 13 83 Export operation Exports the operator information stored in the GOT to a SD card 13 84 Password change Enables changing passwords to be used for login and logout in out of the GOT 13 85 Function setting Enables setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date 13 87 2 Display operation of operator management Main menu gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu z L Debug amp self check ER system alarm display GoT start tine Till Ongrator information management Touch Debug amp self check Operator information management Operator information management Operator information management OperatorName dministrator P0001 PPo002 pPP0003 Level Update 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 Import Add Edit Drive mef A Delete Export 13 74 13 2 Various Data Control 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Operator setting menu setting menu perator managemen
269. nal block jlerminal blocs ge a lt Panel grounding Panel grounding Perform independent grounding at Grounding for I Grounding for two places as shown in Fig A power system power system Measure for Independent grounding can reduce p g 7 9 O Effective the FG cables the influence of noise connected If independent grounding is not O Ineffective allowed be sure to perform shared rounding as shown in Fig B Servo PLC 9 2 E i Connection cable ea os a Fig B FG LG Panel grounding Panel grounding 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 7 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 6 Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed Connection cable Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment Current status Connection cable A single ground cable is led from the panel having the control equipment such as PLC to the panel having the GOT O Led O Not led O Effective O Ineffective 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet Fig A Ground cable Use a short and Ground to Connecting the ground cable to the thick wire as the panel i s possible panel having the GOT as shown in EE Fig A to reduce the potential difference may prevent the malfunction When wiring as shown in Fig A is difficult perform wiring as shown in Fig B Fig B Ground cable Ground to the panel PAN Measure for the gt ground cable
270. nction Functions for GT Works3 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GOT1000 Series GT1695 GT1695M X Abbrevia GT1685 GT1685M S Abbrevia GT1675M S Abbrevia GT1675 GT1675M V Abbrevia Description ion of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD ion of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD ion of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD ion of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbrevia ion of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 GT1672 VN Abbrevia ion of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD GT1665M S Abbrevia GT1665M V Abbrevia GT1662 GT1662 VN Abbrevia GT16 Abbrevia GT1665 ion of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD ion of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD ion of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD ion of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbrevia ion of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbrevia GT1585 S Abbrevia GT1575V S Abbrevia GT1575 S Abbrevia GT1585 ion of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD ion of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD ion of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD ion of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbrevia ion of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbrevia ion of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbrevia GT1565 V Abbrevia GT156 GT1562 VN Abbrevia GT1555 V Abbrevia ion of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD ion of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD ion of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD ion of GT1555 VTBD G
271. nd MODBUS R RTU connection 8 11 2 Installing procedure of RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter 7 Turn the GOT power off 2 Connect the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter to the RS 232 interface on the GOT 3 Fix the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 5V power supply 1 To use the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor select Communication Setting Communication Setting gt 5V power supply Yes on the utility screen of GT14 5V power supply is a function that supplies electrical power to the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor It cannot be used in other controllers For details on the 5V power supply refer to the following 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 2 5V power supply can be set with the GT 14 hardware version B or later In the hardware version A since 5V power is always supplied this setting operation is invalid 3 To use the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor select CoreOS of version V05 28 00AP or later and the standard OS of version V05 28 00 or later for GT14 For details on the version confirmation refer to the following L gt 13 1 2 OS version confirmation 8 16 8 OPTION 8 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and PLC screen display and operation method settings program data control and s
272. nected with GOT Robot Error code of Robot controller Sontroller 12000 to 12999 Q172DRCPU User s manual of the Robot controller connected with GOT Servo E i lifer 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier User s manual of the servo amplifier connected with GOT amplifier q For details of GOT special registers GS262 to 264 refer to the following manual KE GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code Hexadecimal displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number Example When GOT system alarm is 20144 the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H 4 Channel No will not be stored depending on the error code For channel No storage availability for each error code refer to the following lt 3 18 2 2 List of error message system alarm 5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access however it can be specified by confirming the file access error signal b7 to 10 of system signal 2 2 18
273. nitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED blinks green orange and the display section dims while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank DESIGN PRECAUTIONS e The display section is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously
274. nitors with the project data in the C drive 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 13 2 4 Hard copy information Zz F E Function of hardcopy information 9 Carries out delete copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function fra For details of hard copy function refer to the following manual E L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 5 zZ Displaying file folder data The file folder type name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 28 13 29 o 7 Delete File is deleted 13 30 E eat Copy File is copied 13 31 2 8 2 Sere Rename Renames file 13 32 z E 5 O s E Display operation of Hardcopy information g Main menu Program data control E L gt 9 3 Utility Display oT ZER 25 GOT setup A Ww 5 Time setting amp display a 5 Program data gontro ca Touch ee Touch Program data control Hard copy information Za 856 noe bE Hard copy information D ea r 7 Q W Hard copy information E Select drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate hard copy D Internal SRAM data files Ed lt Q 2 T ua 0 0 o a SS oO 0 S m ma T gt lt x eine naO oye waz mkoko mSS GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA
275. ns Item Specifications Model name GT11 50BAT Type Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Application For clock data alarm history reeipe data time action setting value advanced alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area backups For the battery directive in EU member states refer to the following 17 4 mHandling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States Battery life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery replacement time reference 4 to 5 years The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility For details of battery status display refer to the following 11 1 Display Setting 8 4 8 OPTION 8 3 Battery 8 3 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically at intervals of 4 to 5 years as reference 1 Turn the GOT power off 2 Open the battery cover of the GOT 3 Remove the old battery from the GOT 4 Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s 5 Install a new battery to the GOT and close the battery cover Connector 6 Turn the GOT power on 7 Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility For details of battery status di
276. ns and bending radius of the cable as well for installation 30 1 19 152 5 99 gt S gt O O i O o keh P g SD CARD L3 i 7 l F Oz _ H Tr amp N oD je c BATTERY RESET ka a A avoc T HA 1 H A q y o o Unit mm inch 6 INSTALLATION 6 1 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT UL cUL SYSTEM STANDARDS AND p EMC DIRECTIVE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME O lt x j x e no Z WIRING OPTION 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimension Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below Also ensure 10mm of space in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures Horizontal format If the vertical format is selected the dimension must be rotated 90 degrees 153 6 03 208 it gt 4 D 10 0 4 or more z ee P Within 2 0 08 to 4 0 16 Te X 10 0 4 4 Ormore Unit mm inch 6 3 Mounting Position When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be maintained from other structures and devices The below diagram represents a horizontal installatio
277. nstruction may cause a malfunction When the air inside the control panel is purged by pressurization the surface sheet may be lifted by high pressure As a result the touch panel may be difficult to press and the sheet may be peeled off 2 _ This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive pollution is generated in the environment where the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 3 1 General Specifications UL cUL OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 12 Zz O lt o 6 W fal 2 PARTS NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications are as follows Specifications tem GT1455 QTBD E GT1450 QLBD E Type TFT color liquid crystal display Monochrome black white liquid crystal display Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 dots Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard f
278. o use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of Use USB keyboard The setting content is changed by touching YES T NO To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The setting content is changed by touching Japanese 106 keyboard lt gt English 101 keyboard Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button returns the screen to the Operation screen 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 3 Transparent Mode Setting E Function of the transparent mode When using the multi channel function the channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified For the multi channel function and FA transparent function refer to the following manual L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 1 2 Ch No The channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be set Default 1 E Display operation of Transparent mode Main menu GOT setup LF 9 3 Utility Display FA Operation Transpagent mode GOT setup Transparent mode Transparent mode Transparent mode Cho E Setting operation of transparent mode UES Ea 7 Touching the transparent Ch No numerical part ChNo on the left displays the screen to select the D communication driver 1 Select the channel to exe
279. oad operation setup operation a Download operation Transfers the project data stored in the A drive Built in SD Card or E drive USB drive to the C drive Flash Memory The GOT monitors using the data in the C drive This item explains using the A drive GITAR Before download operation 1 Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive is set up the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive Execute setup cancel lt gt 7 b Setup cancel operation before downloading the project data 2 Project data to be stored in a SD card When storing the project data from GT Designer3 to SD card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card E Memory Card Write OE core os TE Write Data OF a Boot OS Destination Memory Card C v GOT Type aTa Boot Project Data C Built in Flash Memory y OS C Built in Flash Memory v Built i I M 13 22 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control Project information Kind Name Size Date Time 29K 06 16 11 16 28 Download now Same named project data has already down loaded Current Target Built Version 207H 207H Built Date 02 01 05 02 01 05 Built Time 216 17 46 16 17 46 Author f Downloading continue Download is completed Restart now Mount the SD card USB memory to GOT For the SD card installation removal method r
280. oaded to the A drive Built in SD card and E drive USB drive The SD card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS This item explains using the A drive OS information Select drive A Built in SD ae C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information Kind Name Size Date DIR 06 16 11 16 00 15520KB 3862528KB Upload is completed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Time 1 Install the SD card used as the uploading destination to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following L7 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive 3 Touching Upload starts the uploading 4 When the upload is completed the dialog shown left is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 2 Various Data Control 13 9 COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL j on nO 13 10 4 5 Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder ame Date Time 05 Name Kind Version Size GIOSMONT OUT 06 16 11 11 17 a Standard monitor 0S Basic 05 27 60 1355K J GIF165LG FON 06 16 11 11 17 16dot Gothic Japanese Europe Basic 05 27 00 500K G1F125LG FON 06
281. ocessing depends on conditions such as OS data capacity and file structure gt Reference value When the capacity is 4 Mbytes Around 6 seconds 2 e When the capacity is 12 Mbytes Around 18 seconds g 5 Precautions for operation AG a Copying project data f If the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same the project data cannot be Sy copied 22 If the drives are the same cancel the setup 828 b When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the SD card or USB memory created with GOT data 2 package acquisition the utility setting is also copied Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need aan c SD card or USB memory to be used 25 When performing GOT data package acquisition do not store other data to the SD card or USB memory ane If doing so the previous data will be unavailable B50 lt E lt Q T ua 0 O o a a fe S fa ve T So z eine ogo ase woZ 0 0 woo GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 91 13 2 Various Data Control 13 92 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND Zz Q SELF CHECK 5 5 Zz m
282. of Select Drive displays the ogging Information X information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder 3 Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy 4 Touching 5 fw button of the scrollbar scrolls up W Copy ove Polder down the screen by one line Touching j button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touching a file name selects the file 6 For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1L CSV GiL TXT This section 2 Delete is ccc sdrc center savecveracies This section 3 COPY AE L gt This section 4 MOVG s j ccn cial This section 5 Rename This section 6 Create Folder cceeees _ This section 7 i Touching x button closes the screen COPY PROGRAM DATA FILE DISPLAY AND CONTROL j on nO 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 55 13 2 Various Data Control 13 56 b 60KB 3862528KB BIL 05V Copy Move Greate BIL TXT Del Renam ing Information KindName Size DIR IPROJECT 1 TXT ARPO001 1K CS LOGO0001_0000 1K 3344KB 386 1584KB 2 ile Please select destination Execute Cancel File conversion from GIL to CSV Source file LOGOO0001_0002 G1L Change to LOGOOOOO1_00
283. of GT Designer3 is changed For details of Adjust and Broadcast refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL E Display operation of time setting Main menu Time setting amp display K gt 9 3 Utility Display in Nenu x ae Time Setting amp display x Clock setting GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Time setting amp display Set the Time setting 06 16 2011 15 54 59 TUE N and Clock setting GOT internal battery None Low voltage status CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 12 1 Time Setting and Display E Operation of time setting 1 Clock setting 12 2 Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and the clock data of controller connected to the GOT It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Setting Description Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of controller Adjust Adjust the time of controller clock data to the GOT clock data Broadcast Adjust Broadcast None No adjustment of clock data Time Setting amp display xi 1 Touching the setup item changes the setup contents
284. of alarm has exceeded The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history 311 upper limit display function has exceeded the maximum points x Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory No of sampling has exceeded and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 312 upper limit e Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph x Delete collected data e Set the Operation at frequency over time to Initialize and Continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device z Correct device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation Cannot display or input operation 3146 value result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed x value Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range Review expression in which the device type can be expressed Data of an object to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set are collected too frequently or the number of objects has Too high frequency of data exceeded the number of objects collectable simultaneously 317 collection Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object x Review conditions Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects to which Coll
285. of loggingfile is converted to Unicode text file 13 56 ti 5 eee Del File or folder is deleted 13 57 Copy File is copied 13 58 o oO Move File is moved 13 59 E Rename File name is changed 13 60 abe 26 Create Folder New folder is created 13 61 2 E u T 5 Na 20 E Display operation of Logging information eS Main menu Program data control Ss lt S gt 9 3 Utility Display one Zag 83 Communication sett ing z Pe S GOT setup aj Alarm information E D E A Tine setting amp display i Project infornat ion 2 m Program datag ontrol Hard copy informat ion Q W gi ti ti S 5 z X i Advanced Recipe information Touch Program data control Logging information Logging information Logging Information belect Drive Ed lt Q T K 0 0 o a SS oO 0 S m ma T gt lt x eine naO oye waz mkoko re SRS D nternal SRAM Select a drive and operate logging data files GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 53 13 2 Various Data Control E Display example of Logging information Logging Information Storage file folder display screen ring Information i I L 0600001_0001 3 Logging Information ogging Information Select Drive A Built in SD card D Internal SRAM BIL gt CSY
286. of path cannot exceed 78 characters E Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in SD card or USB memory 2a 34s j t T Ses 2 characters 1 character Extension 3S 58 4 characters Drive name 1 character a oO Zz eS E aia Max 78 characters Z Z 5 Sew 5 2 Sw If folder is assigned the hierarchy lt The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also am counted as one character 206 a ane b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file SES OnE The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX CON e NUL PRN CLOCK In addition the folder file name shown below cannot be used The folder name which begins with G1 Folder name and file name which begin with period Folder name and file name which finish with period Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods lt lt Q T K 0 0 o a a fe S m ma x gt lt L eine naO aE waz mkoko mSS c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the advanced recipe information screen the file other than that for advanced recipe
287. om the GOT after changing the settings If the GOT data is copied with the GOT data package acquisition the change in the Ethernet setting screen is reflected to the copied data 10 16 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 Ethernet Setting Change of host QJ71E71 s 2 Touch the OK button 3 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 17 10 3 Ethernet Setting 10 18 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 3 Ethernet Setting 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION z Q SETTINGS GOT SET UP O Z i 3 Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from the utility screen In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Item Description Reference g Language opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight battery alarm display and invert colors 11 1 2 a Display ZES Adjusting brightness and contrast 11 5 2 we lt Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume key sensitivity key reaction speed touch detection mode 11 6 S 8 2u Security setting 11 9 ti z oO Operation Utility call key 11 11 Shas Touch panel calibration 11 13 USB mouse keyboard setting 11 15 2 Transparent mode Ch No 11 17 Setting the storage loca
288. ommunicating with controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader RFID etc or PC OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9pin male 2 RS 422 485 interface For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board etc D sub 9pin female 3 USB interface USB interface for data transfer data storage host 4 Preventive hole from removing Hole fixed with banding band or others as a prevention from removing for the USB cable for the USB cable 2 g 5 Rating plate nameplate The model name current consumption product number H W version and BootOS version are described 6 SD card interface Interface for installing the SD card to the GOT 7 SD card access LED Lit SD card being accessed Not lit SD card is not accessed Prohibits accessing the SD card removing the card from the GOT 8 SD card access switch ON SD card being accessed SD card removal prohibited OFF SD card not accessed SD card removal possible 9 Batte GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history recipe data time action setting value advanced y alarm advanced recipe logging hard copy and SRAM user area 10 Battery cover Opens closes when the battery is replaced or the terminating resistor is selected 11 Power terminal Power terminal and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and grounding 12 Power terminal cover Opens closes when the power terminal is connected color transparent 13 Reset switch Swit
289. on atossici lage neni edi eeedb en i a eei i enemies ceeded 17 7 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeneeeeeeteeeeeetieeeeeeeas 17 7 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration SNo banieira a a r iinet 18 1 18 2 Error Message and System Alarm cccccccccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeceeeeeesaaeeeeesenaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeas 18 11 1822 1 Error coments CIS PIAY ataa aiai chin ecua ch eta cate ARAE DAT e AAEE EEE AR 18 11 18 2 2 List of error message SysteM AlarM cc cecceceneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaeeeesesneeeeeeeeaaes 18 13 APPENDICES Appendix T External DIM NSIONS si2 03 Asai eee ethers dete a ideale App 1 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function cece ceeccce eee e cece cece eeceeaeceeeeeeeeeeeseneeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeess App 7 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions 0 0 0 0 ccccceececeeeeceee cee ee cette eet ce eaaaeaeceeeeeeeeesesenesencacaeeeeeeeeeesees App 9 Appendix 3 1 RelevantimodelS ees ii a saute guaetedeceatesaand Penedanea gett aaa ea aaa App 9 Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeceenaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesececnceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeines App 9 INDEX REVISIONS Ee MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product Refer to each manual for any purpose Manual Name GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundament
290. on a new level is not reflected until you log out of the GOT once and log in the GOT again 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control rd input AdaeoS _ _ lt gt ACD AEA ie Operator information edit DperatorName Operator ID Level LE Password Ka Make a permanent password Ci Use ext auth ID Extauth o C __ K _Cancel_ The operator information editing process is completed If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL d e f g 3 For changing passwords during editing touch the password The New password input dialog box is displayed and then input a password When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the password input is completed the New password input confirmation dialog box is displayed Input the same password For enabling the setting of Make a permanent password touch the check box for Make a permanent password and then the setting is switched Disabled MV Enabled For using the external authentication ID touch the check box Use ext auth ID and switch the setting alr The external authentication ID is not used M The external authentication ID is used Touch Ext auth ID to display the external authentication ID input dialog box and enter the ex
291. on check No error Restart 5 When an error occurs the dialog box that shows the RS23 communication check GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the _ Error error appears and then the GOT restarts in five Veri ee seconds When the dialog box shown left appears check the following e Check if the hardware has no problems lt gt 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 16 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check 14 2 6 Ethernet status check E Ethernet status check function Ethernet status check is a function that sends a ping to check the connection status with the equipment on the Ethernet E Display operation of Ethernet status check Main menu Debug amp self check L gt 9 3 Utility Display munication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data contral ga Debug amp self check Self check Touch Debug amp self check Ethernet status check Ethernet status c IP address of the other terminal Self check Touch panel check 1 0 check Ethergg status check Ethernet status check crani uw W 12 a Zz lt x 0 jaa W a 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 17 14 2 Self Check 14 18 E Operation of Ethernet status check Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal Ping transmission Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal
292. on which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set x 2 P wW O O Applicable x Not applicable Not required 5 W Drawin lt A Setting Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication i O fe O interfaces Communication Communication setting Setting communication parameters O O O 8 setting Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling oO oO T sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU x m 5 Ethernet setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting changing the host O x O Q Switching message languages O O O Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time O O O Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving O O O Display Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF O O N iw Adjusting brightness and contrast O O x Z Inverting colors Oo x m a Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer O O lt ing the key sensitivity and key reaction speed O O x Changing security levels O O x Operation GOT setup Setting the utility call keys O O O Adjusting the touch panel O O x Setting the USB mouse and keyboard O x x Setting the channel No to be used for the communication for the FA Transparent mode O x O transparent function Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup data Backup restoration Trigger backup settings O x O Setting the CP
293. onfirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expense The primary failure diagnosis will ho
294. ont 20 characters x 15 lines Horizontal format 12 dot standard font 26 characters x 20 lines Horizontal format Display section g Display color Display angle 2 65536 colors Monochrome black white 16 scales Left Right 80 degrees Top 80 degrees Bottom 60 Left Right 45 degrees Top 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Intensity of liquid crystal display only 400 cd m 300 cd m Backlight Touch panelt Contrast adjustment Intensity adjustment Life Life Type Key size Number of points touched simultaneously 32 level adjustment 8 level adjustment Approx 50 000h Time for contrast to become 1 5 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C LED type irreplaceable Backlight off screen saving time can be set 3 Approx 70 000h or longer Time for display intensity reaches 50 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Analog resistive film Minimum 2 x 2 dots per key Simultaneous presses not allowed Only 1 point can be touched Life 1 million times operating force 0 98N max aE Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory Garve Life Number of write times 100 000 times D drive SRAM internal 512Kbytes battery backup GT11 50BAT lithium battery Battery Backup target E a S Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C RS 422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115200 57600
295. or project data is zs stored in the SD card interface of the GOT FE 325 2 Switch ON the SD card access switch of GOT Zhe oz 3 Power on the GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation D function WwW 4 The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in 22 a Now installing BootOS the built in flash memory ey The SD card access LED is lit during the install a 5 execution aoc Do not pull out the SD card or power off the GOT while the SD card access LED is lit ae 5 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation 2 3 Reboot is completed ZRO When the standard monitor OS is already installed i E the GOT restarts by touching the OK button Sew Byres 6 After confirming normal restart switch off the SD 2 card access switch of the GOT Confirm that the lt card access LED is not lit and remove the SD card ze from the SD card interface of the GOT Oo BES wae 00 LOO or Wo oa u Mo eRe Wu B25 gt Bie oi oe 56 nO i On O uge 259 285 E 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 5 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 6 2 When installing with USB memory Now installing BootOS Reboot 1 Drives to be used When installing OS at power on use the A or E drive Power off the GOT and install the USB memory where the BootOS standard monitor OS or projec
296. ort regulations ae zo Ze Appendix 3 1 Relevant models E rao z The battery for the GOT1000 series is classified as shown in the table below zZ Appendix 3 2 Transportation guidelines z Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company ay CA lu a p lt APPENDICES App 9 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions App 10 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions INDEX A A list edit r isenana dnatactescensane 14 1 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS A 15 Adjusting the touch panel position 11 13 Advanced recipe information 0 ccceee 13 33 Alarm information cceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 11 B Backlight Shutoff Detection eee 17 7 Backup restoration cccecceceeeeeeteeestceeeneees 14 2 Backup Restoration Setting eee 11 18 Battery ea annin annienta anan a aniei iaaa 8 4 17 4 Battery alarm display ceeeeeseeeeeeeees 11 1 11 4 Behavior of Duplicate IPS eceeeeeeees 11 21 BOOIOS acioni na r ANANS 16 1 Brightness Contrast cccceeeeeeseeteees 11 1 11 5 Buzzer volum
297. ou sez 13 1 Data Storage Location a SE 2 13 1 1 Data type and storage location ase E System 8 The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below E Also the data storage locations are shown below 225 ze 258 OW O C drive i Built in flash memory _ ________ _ __ _ __________ x A D i PC 228 l 3 GB oot0S GT Designer3 es BootOS Install Upload i PSE Project data Download Project data l sie J J Copy files on Write SE 2 TT Windows Sie Project data F Adrive E drive l Built in SD card USB drive ooN a D gt Inserting Removing lt E lt Q T K 0 0 o a SS oO 0 S m ve lt Ss lt L eine ee OSE woZ mkoko LOO USB memory when installed in GOT when installed in GOT USB memory when installed in PC when installed in PC Install Write Upload Read 4 The data of the Flash Memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes low GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF S Item Data type Storage location D T BootOS BootOS Built in flash memory C drive 2 Standard monitor OS Communication driver Built in SD card A drive lt 5 4 Built in flash memory C drive aid Extended function OS 3 2 aog Option OS S z Project data Built in SD card A drive As i iii A w O Project data Including recipe setting alarm condition
298. ount of external authentication ID from among the data read from the Initial position input Pas i O external authentication device 0 to 1998 bytes z oO zZ Valid byte count input Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID 2 to 16 bytes E 255 2 Display operation of function setting aa BHG SOS Main menu Debug amp self check Operator setting menu LF 9 3 Utility Display S Main Menu 5 RTE 7 a oO Communication setting E tater EA 5 F 2 aoe EEN system alarm displa 4 z eee ee Password change Z z g m Orgator information management FPA Funcegen sett ine m E if lt Bon SES N Touch Cae Debug amp self Operator information check management Function setting Function setting lt E lt Q T K 0 0 o a oO 0 S m ve lt Ss lt L peel nO ase woZ mkoko LOO Function setting Auth method Operator name password Automatic logout time 0 min 1 60 0 invalid Password expiration date 0 day 1 1000 0 always Ext auth ID Initial position input Valid byte count input oJ Byte 0 1998 C Byte 2 16 OK Cancel GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 87 13 2 Various Data Control Function setting operation Operator setting menu E Operator management
299. ox Function name Setting ID Initialize rc 11 13 14 Description Touch the check box to select or clear the item Displays the used functions in the order of the advanced system alarm advanced user alarm and logging function Displays the setting IDs The setting IDs of the advanced system alarm are not displayed 4 5 Size Setting name Displays the data size Displays the setting name For the setting name only characters within the display range are displayed 6 7 Date and time Number of selected files Displays the creation date and time of each data Displays the information of the items currently selected 8 SRAM area Displays the current free space size or total size of the SRAM user area 9 Drive space Displays the current free space size or total size of the drive selected for Select drive 10 Initialize all Initializes all areas of the SRAM user area 11 Initialize selected area Select each area of the SRAM user area to initialize multiple areas of the SRAM user area 12 13 Select drive Restoration Switches drives to be used for the data backup or restoration in the SRAM user area Saves the data in the selected drive to SRAM user area The following drives can be switched only when a SD card or USB memory is installed SD card A Built in SD card USB memory E USB drive 14 Backup all area S
300. played Touching OK button closes the dialog j 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 12 Record match operation Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller After executing loading saving with advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected Select the recipe file and touch the Execute Ac Advanced Recipe Information button SIRT GIP JARPOOO1 HOKE H 16KB 3861584KB Seal LSE 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for matching the device value File Name f Setting No 2 Name product2 Process 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting 3 Touching the Match records GOT PLC button Record No 1 displays the dialog box shown left Record Comment Process 1 setting 4 Touching the OK button starts matching record Execute record matching lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z Ss a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO 5 When matching is completed completion dialog Matching progressed box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 6 If selected record does not match to the device Matching error value of controller the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 49 13 2 Various Data Control 13 50 13 Device value delete operat
301. ps and electric wire chips into the ventilation window of the GOT when you drill screw holes or perform wiring Otherwise fire failure or malfunction may be caused Connect connection cables securely to the specified connectors while the power is turned OFF Imperfect connection may cause malfunction or failure Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight dust lamp black conductive dust corrosive gas combustible gas high temperature condensation wind rain vibrations and impacts Electric shock fire malfunction product damage or deterioration can be caused Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Also undertightening can disable waterproof or oil proof effect Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Also distortion of the GOT or the panel may disable waterproof or oil proof effect 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Vertical installation of the GOT requires a space with the same dimensions as the horizontal installation turned 90 degrees clockwise seen from the display side Applicable cable Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensio
302. put to external device lamp buzzer etc The following provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b14 Backlight shutoff detection System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a backlight shutoff Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 MOV D36 K4M20 Backlight shutoff detection M34 Output to external device of PLC ye Activated the output upon backlight shutoff detection ee hutoff detecti indicates the output number at which the external device is connected Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 7 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 8 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 18 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet and the error message system alarm list 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND coll ESOO lcm e INSPECTION This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally which are listed in check sheets The following explains how to u
303. r supply button in Communication Setting Communication Setting Standard I F Setting R5422 485 MELSEC FX RS232 Mul tidrop slave ChNo USB 9 Host PC 1 ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device B External device 9 PC connection INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING fej l O z 6 ro 2 Touch the setting item of 5V power supply when using the RS 232 485 conversion adaptor The pouen setting content is changed by touching YES C N 5V power supply YES w O 2 3 Select Yes to change the setting of the 5V power supply Touching the OK button reflects the changed settings Touching x button returns the screen to the Communication Setting screen BV power supply 5V power suppl YES Communication Setting j di Standard I F Setting gt Mul tidrop slave Cho USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet None Definition of ChNo O None 1 2 FA device 8 External device 9 PC connection 3 cH let jp CH Driver assign K indicating the setting to supply the 5V power supply is displayed 4 Touch the OK button in the Communication Setting screen 5 Touching the x button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 7 10 1 Communication setting 10 2 Communication Detail Setting 10
304. r to GOT or delete backup data with the backup restoration GOT data package acquisition is also possible For details of backup restoration refer to the following manuals lt GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 14 2 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 1 Debug 14 2 Self Check z o o The following describes the functions available as the self check function 5 i Carries out write read check of the SD card USB memory built in flash memory or internal SRAM Memory check 14 3 2 passera B EJ JE Drawing check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 6 S Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 10 z lu Touch panel check Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit 2 dots x 2 dots 14 12 2 z O I O check Carries out RS 232 RS 422 485 connecting target confirmation and self loopback check 14 14 E D z Ow Ethernet status check Sends a ping to check the Ethernet connection status 14 17 Z 2 2 AE Szo n 14 2 1 Memory check g E Ww F eine E Memory check function ee Sew Memory check function carries out the write read check of A drive Built in SD Card C drive Flash Memory D drive 2 e Internal SRAM and E drive USB memory 252 Function Description A drive memory check Checks whether the memory Built in SD card of the A drive can be read written normally
305. rately Product Cabl eo Model name a Contents name length GT09 C30R20701 9S For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20702 25P For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley Adapter Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately produci Model name eae Contents name length RS 232 cable GT09 C30R20801 9S For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Gable Contents name length RS 232 cable GT09 C30R21401 4T For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller SD card Sold separately L1MEM 2GBSD SD memory card 2GB SD card L1MEM 4GBSD SDHC memory card 4GB Commercially available SD card a 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model Hime T P 0089 separately available or contact your local distributor 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 5 2 2 System Equipment UL cUL OVERVIEW z O o We Z E SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PARTS NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION USB memory Sold separately Model name 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available
306. ration all data on the SD card will be initialized Please do not remove SD card while formatting Format the SD card Format now Format is complete Restrictions on formatting Mount the SD card USB memory to GOT For inserting removing method of SD card USB memory refer to the following 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 8 2 2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection Touching Format button displays the password input screen Typing 4 4 4 and touching the Enter key display the dialog box shown on the left The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog box and touch OK button when execute the format of SD card or USB memory To cancel the memory card format touch Cancel button When touching the OK button in 4 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Reconfirm whether to format the SD card or USB memory Touching the OK button starts the format Touching the Cancel button cancels the format of SD card or USB memory When the formatting is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box e When use an unformatted SD card or USB memory in GOT format the SD card or USB memory by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted SD card or USB memory The formatting of
307. reen Design Manual f Functions z ao lt n gt 7 WIRING ae Wire for the GOT power supply and the controller 22 Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 Vv Wire for the controller power supply and I O LF Controller manuals z o i g W oO n Turn on the power of GOT and controller Lu 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND Z STANDARD MONITOR OS Install the OS to GOT E 3 Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Check that the OS is installed to GOT STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL L3 Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Download project data Fundamentals Zz Turn on the controller power and check that the GOT o recognizes the controller S E n g zZ Check that the monitoring is normal 9 Z x z z H oO 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features eel 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration OVERVIEW The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 A Bar code Protective Refer to BOC reader cover for oil 8 5 SS ae Seea z O o We Z E SYSTEM RFID 2 SD card Refer to MN Stana Refer to gm
308. reen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF 5 Battery alarm display ON E 2a Brightness contrast Setting z E Z EHE SOS Sos Select Language 2 Touching the button of a desired language selects EFE i Sui Te the language and returns the screen to the Display SES A screen gt English sA o 2 z Deutsch 3 E ales o 26 gt E u gga a ee 5 Do 3 Touching OK button defines the setting contents aoc Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec x3 a Screen save time 0 Min O None 258 239 Screen save backlight OFF 8 es Z2 lt 2 Battery alarm display ON BOF ron Brightness contrast Setting Se wy Bae Touching x button without touching OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left With da not push OK Button OK button The changed value is canceled and FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA if you close the screen the changed a value will be canceled the screen is closed Z 0K P P Cancel button The display setting screen is 6 displayed 4 Closing the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between
309. ring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise O Effective O Ineffective Measure for the cables mixed 2 Panel outside wiring Pi li AE Da O Installed together Currant siatus The power line and communication cable are installed together O Not installed h together Communication cable Bowerlina SF Leading the power line and Fig A Communication cable communication cable outside the panel H E at separate places can make the Measure for communication cable less influenced by the cables noise from the power line Installing the O Effective installed Power Wiring Separator communication cable apart from the O Ineffective power line or using a separator made of metal in the duct as shown in Fig B can make the communication cable less Power Communication influenced by noise line cable together es i 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 5 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND aitolU R 5 eeni lca e INSPECTION APPENDICES 3 Wiring of GOT s FG cable and power line O Installed together O Not installed together The FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together Current status Power for the power equipment Measure for the cables installed together FG Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduce
310. rmally Proceed to 4 GOT restoration procedure 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 3 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet MAINTENANCE AND coll ESON Cam e INSPECTION APPENDICES 4 GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from a and in order to check if the GOT is restored If the GOT is not restored proceed to the next item Check item a Press the GOT reset switch O Restored O Not restored Proceed to b Cause b Power the GOT ON OFF O Restored O Not restored Proceed to c c Reset or power ON OFF the PLC The GOT may have malfunctioned CPU O Restored O Not restored Proceed to d temporarily due to noise d Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON OFF simultaneously O Restored O Not restored Proceed to e e Connect the cable again O Restored O Not restored Proceed to f f Reinstall the project data O Restored O Not restored Proceed to g g Reinstall the OS O Restored OS O Not restored Proceed to h h Take the action described in the Action column O Restored O Not restored Proceed to i The cable connection may be faulty Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF during the installation of project data or The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise Action Take the action of 4 h Securely connect the cable If an error occurs again proc
311. rsion Confirm the hardware version with the rating plate of the GOT MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL mopEL GT1455 QTBDE IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 8 40W MAX SIN 1217999 CO ma W see CQ MAC ADD 002692621206 i J MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC COPORATION Hardwa re MADE IN JAPAN JY550D26101C version eee CONT EQ E General notes on Power supply This equipment must be supplied by a UL Listed or Recognized 24V DC rated power supply and UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 4A or a UL Listed Class 2 power supply 5 2 EMC Directive For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products e This product is designed for use in industrial applications e Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 7 3 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8310 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Himeji Works 840 Chiyoda machi Himeji Hyogo 670 8677 Japan e Manufactured at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works 1 14 Yada minami 5 Chome Higashi ku Nagoya 461 0048
312. ry Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight GT14 requires LED replacement For replacement of the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up For details refer to the following L gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Q zZ a 6 r Fae ab m Zo ep 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm When the GOT detects a backlight shutoff the system information set with drawing software is turned on You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer using system information To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger For details of the system information refer to the following APPENDICES GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals why Hnr O Example of alarm out
313. s lt SS JO pee a oao OFF WW AI mkoko re S 13 48 11 Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record pAPOECT i nd GIP ARPOOO1 1K R HTOKB 386 1584KB Eile BIP gt CSV 61P gt TXT PrE File Name A JJJJ GIP Setting No 2 Name product2 iar 1 setting Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Load record GOT PLC es lt Record Comment Process 1 settinf Save record Match recordsDelete Device PLC 60T GOTSPLC Value ZIX CIVIBININ Enter Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to save record Process completed 7 Select the recipe file and touch the Execute button 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for saving the device value Touching the Save record PLC GOT button displays the screen shown left For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital a z English minuscule 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touching the OK button starts saving record When saving is completed completion dialog box is dis
314. s time action and GOT setup Sii flash memory C drive d u 4 The USB memory can be used from Utility 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility 2 When using the project data stored in the built in SD card A drive with the GOT hold the SD card installed to the GOT The USB memory cannot be activated directly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 13 1 Data Storage Location E At maintenance C drive D drive z Built in flash memory Built in SRAM I Copy Copy Alarm 1 Alarm I I Hard copy Hard copy A drive E drive Standard CF card USB drive aN Recipe w2 gg USB memory USB memory when installed SD card when installed in GOT Inserting when installed in PC in PC PC GT Designer3 A Copy files on carey l Windows I SD card when installed in GOT Removing Install Write gt Upload Read Item Data type Storage location Alarm data Extended alarm log file and alarm log file Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Built in SD card A drive Internal SRAM D drive Logging Logging Logging file USB drive E drive Image file Hard copy function 13 2 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL The USB memory can be used from Utility
315. s care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables Optional ferrite cores are recommended when the cable route is close to EMC noise sources like welders large motors etc All tests have been performed with original Mitsubishi cables For customer prepared cables please refer to the previous page GOT Unit GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE Example 1 Existing Cables User Made Cables 3 party cables need to be independently Ex GT01 C30R4 8P as shown in EX 1 tested by the user to demonstrate EMC compliance F Ferrite core Ex NEC TOKIN ESD R 17S or similar GT01 C30R4 8P Programmable controller 250mm isl k 100mm 9 84inch 3 93inch i as a ee F F jE F z GOT units Tomm aes uipped 5 5tinch eee Optional Optional 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive 6 INSTALLATION MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS lt DANG ER e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration Never drop cutting chi
316. s the influence of noise O Effective O Ineffective Power for the power equipment 4 Surge measures A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB electromagnetic contactor relay solenoid valve or induction motor O Used When a surge suppressor is used fill out O Not used the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used Current status Output Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influence of surge on the GOT Output O Effective O Ineffective The surge suppressor must be attached close to the load Entry area Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name 18 6 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet 5 Grounding status Servo Connection cable FG LG NIA CN18 The FG cables of the control equipment such as PLC and the O Connected power equipment such as servo O Not amplifier are connected as shown connected by a MAINTENANCE AND coU ESOO eee INSPECTION ON CNS Current status FG a Panel grounding Panel grounding Servo PLC iL Connection cable cura cnt FG iy SE oh m LG n 7 Ww FG GOT O Fig A 5 FG i li Termi
317. screen shown E on the left Z z 5 Fu 3 Touching OK button executes the upload 5 z ao a8 256 lt A BS ee 4 if there is a project data of the same name in the A gar x 8 z a The projet dita is already existed drive the screen shown on the left is displayed 93E If upload is done the project data without starting the upload is deleted Do you want to execute Touching OK button executes an overwrite upload to the project data of the same name Touching Cancel button cancels the upload lt lt A lt o oO O pe gt Q Q fa ve z So z ina ogo ase woZ 0 0 woo 5 When the uploading is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed UP Us CONDE Touching OK button restarts the GOT GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN COREOS BOOTOS INSTALLATION OF AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 25 13 2 Various Data Control 13 26 b Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled Disable setup Execute now Disable setup is completed Restart now Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive Touching Upload button displays the screen shown on the left Touching OK button executes the setup cancel When the setup cancel is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching OK button restarts the GOT After restart the GOT mo
318. se each sheet 1 When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions GOT status check sheet When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions identify the cause of the malfunction etc with GOT status check sheet and take corrective action When the GOT is restored see the status for a while 2 When the wiring status needs to be improved GOT installation status check sheet When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction etc based on the check result of 1 above take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet When the GOT is restored see the status for a while APPENDICES 3 When corrective action other than 1 and 2 above is required System configuration check sheet If malfunction etc occurs even after checking with 1 and 2 above please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system When sending a troubled product attach the GOT restoration sheets GOT status check sheet GOT installation status check sheet System configuration check sheet checked in this section Please keep copies of the restoration sheets 18 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 1 18 1 GOT Restoration Sheet E GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from 1 GOT status Proceed as instructed by Action 1 GOT status Phenomenon Cause status a Frequency when the GOT does not oper
319. splay refer to the following 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY a 2 Q 12 8 OPTION 8 3 Battery 8 4 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated For the GOT the protective sheet is attached for transportation It is different from the one described in this chapter 8 4 1 Applicable protective sheet Product name Model name GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW Description Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets 8 4 2 Installing procedure 7 Ifthe protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to the GOT remove it too Remove the release paper from the back of a new 2 R the rel from the back of 4 protective sheet Do not remove the protective film CA Make sure to fit the sheet on the GOT without wrinkles or air between the sheet and the GOT 4 Remove the protective film from the protective sheet k When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed CONAR Replacement time of protective sheet Check the status of the
320. stalled in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 3 The above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dBHV m 10m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 47dBHV m 10m in measurement range 5 2 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 EMC Directive Control panel GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 Control panel a The control panel must be conductive b When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency c When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible d Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency e Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the
321. stment screen Z Language Japanese 2 Opening screen time 5 Sec Z Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON 5 Brightness contrast etting K 22 x ft oe For monochrome screen aw z oz 2 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key X Brightness setting i of brightness adjustment Contrast setting 3 Contrast can be adjusted by touching key of Pd contrast adjustment 4 Touching OK button defines the setting contents 3 n 0 zZ F N O E lt ir W A O ann 225 TOF 2 e lt L N ae aQ oof Touching x button without touching OK button With do not push OK button displays the dialogue box shown on the left if you close the screen the changed OK button The changed value is canceled and value will be canceled 0K the screen is closed Cancel button The brightness contrast adjustment screen is displayed CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 5 11 1 Display Setting 11 2 Operation Setting Settings Regarding Operation 11 2 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The it
322. such as PLC output unit Remedy for DC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other L Load DC Place the surge killer near the load Output equipment such as PLC output unit 7 6 7 WIRING 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 8 OPTION 8 1 SD Card The SD card is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function For details refer to the following K gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 8 1 1 Applicable SD card The following SD cards are applicable for GOT Model name Description L1MEM 2GBSD SD memory card 2GB L1MEM 4GBSD SDHC memory card 4GB Commercially available SD card 4 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model Hime T P 0089 separately available or contact your local distributor 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card Install remove the SD card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or SD card access switch is OFF E Installing 7 Set the SD card access switch of the GOT to OFF and od make sure eee that the SD card access LED turns off When the SD card access LED turns off the SD card can be installed even during the GOT power on Z Insert the SD card into the
323. t Operator management Ri Function s 3 Display example of operator management i zZ a Operator information management screen H O Z 5 i 3 g Z 2 i efi fee 25 z Z 2012 07 22 ee Sus 223 See Sus 828 7 0 zZ z Delete Undo oT 26 gt Seb IoP a 5 Export save SHS za 252 No Item Description aq 83 a Operator Name Displays operator names 2 z 2 PS gt b ID Displays operator IDs 4 a D oZ c Level Displays security levels for operators oae d Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information e Operation keys Execution keys for each function a Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information 2 z f Drive in use Touch the item and then the display switches A Built in SD card z amp The display switches only when USB drive is installed on the GOT a g ay wa 30 LO p O X ca Q Oo GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 75 13 2 Various Data Control 13 76 b No a Operator information edit screen Touch the Add button or touch the Edit button with the operator information selected on the Operator information management screen and then the Operator information edit screen is displayed The operator informat
324. t Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction e The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS e Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory c
325. t data is stored in the USB interface of the GOT The BootOS cannot be stored in the USB memory where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored Power on the GOT while pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen 1 point press installation function The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed the GOT restarts by touching the OK button After confirming normal restart remove USB memory from the USB interface of the GOT For removing methods of the USB memory refer to the following L gt 13 2 9 USB device status display 2 Installation by pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen When the OS boot drive is set to the A or E drive installation by pressing upper left corner of the GOT screen is not available 16 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory 16 3 2 Installing using the program data control function Utility Zz O For details on program data control function refer to the following S L gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL T z 5 POINT Precaution on executing program data control function A When execute program data control function standard monitor OS has
326. t can be specified from 4 corners on the screen By keeping pressing the screen a setting to switch the screen to the utility is available 5 This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation g o5 BES Operation setting by GT Designer3 Eas egz Select Common Settings GOT Environment Settings gt GOT Setup from GT Designer3 to make the settings 325 of the utility call key SES To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E Display operation of Utility call key 7 0 z F o z O E S ld Wi a e a Lu N E Q DISPLAY AND Main menu GOT setup Operation LF 9 3 Utility Display SHORT ON Setting Main Menu GOT setup eration onmunicat ion settin E Disp la Window bi a Tag ur i tting ras Tine setti nN sp lay ranspar NYgde Setting Key sa vi a rogran dat d w re epee pal Debug amp self chet E Bp T GOT setu i p Operation Utility call key Menu call key Menu call key x Pressing time 0 SEC BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Touch buttons to set for the utility call key GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK Pressing time is effective only in case one point
327. t small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password again LIXICIVIBINIM Enter 6 When the new password is correctly input the dialog The password change is completed box shown left is displayed and the password is changed 13 86 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Function setting E 1 Function setting function 5 q Z The functions for the operator information can be set gt The following items can be set Z Items Description Reference 2 The time from when the last time the GOT is operated until when you automatically log out of the GOT can be Automatic logout time set 13 88 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid 2a a 2 Auth method The authentication method can be switched Operator name password External auth general 13 88 Ze 3 When External auth general is selected the check box for Operator name password is displayed A z Ow 50 Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the operator authentication 1 to 1000 days 0 a3 Password expiration date is invalid 13 89 5 E 5 O s When the password is out of date after setting the password the GOT requests the password change io Pe Set the initial position input byte c
328. t text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol J Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 Touching OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 9 G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance Advanced Recipe Setting No Advanced Recipe Name E5 HAHI ALTII JA Target file A ARPO0001 G1P Do you want to create the fi le Continued to next page Touch the Create G1P button 2 The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button As the input key window is displayed input the file name for new file By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 45 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z x in oO e iva a a le ro ja os lt gt Jo pee a oao OFF WW ai exe Te O 1
329. ternal recognition ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the authentication method is set to Fingerprint auth or External auth general the external authentication ID can be input with the external authentication device Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added Touch the Cancel button or the button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 13 79 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa z z Ss a pee a oao aS E w z exe LOO 13 80 b Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT Operator information management OperatorName ID Administrator DPOOO 1001 10 OPO002 1002 12 OPO003 1003 12 2012 00 22 2012 07 22 Operator information edit x OperatorName Operator ID Level Password C take a permanent password C Use ext auth ID Ext auth ID OK Cancel The operator information editing process is completed If you close the screen before pressing OK button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed 1 Select the operator information to be edited with touching the operator information 2 Touch the Edit button 3 The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then tou
330. the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following C gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamental 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designers For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following C gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting GOT Environmental Setting Language Switching INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 3 11 1 Display Setting E Opening screen screen save time Language Japanese Opening screen time Screen save time 0 sec 0 None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Language Japanese Opening screen time E Sec Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK f Z Touching the setting time numerical displays the keyboard Input numeric with the keyboard Touching OK button defines the setting contents Touching x button without touching OK button displays the dialogu
331. the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application
332. time Within Sme Noise immunity Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1us by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10M or larger by insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 mm or more for power supply 2 mm or more for grounding Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even upon 5ms or shorter instantaneous power failure The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 3 3 Power Supply Specifications OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 12 Zz ie lt o 5 W fal i STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE PARTS NAME UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 4 PARTS NAME 4 1 Front Panel OVERVIEW MITSUBISHI Goticoo CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt SPECIFICATIONS Ww T No Name Description 1 Display section Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen a a 2 Touch panel For touch switch operation on the utility screen and the user creation scre
333. tion Zz O H E Function of alarm information O The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive A Built in SD card C Flash Memory D Internal re SRAM E USB drive is displayed E The functions below can be carried out for files E The USB drive only stores log files and cannot be displayed For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 2B Eo Displaying file folder data The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 12 13 13 S 8 s Sie 2 G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file 13 14 ti 5 ozo G1A gt TXT conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT file 13 14 Delete File is deleted 13 15 D o Copy File is copied 13 16 Lu a 2 T E Display operation of Alarm information 5 Igoa ae Main menu Program data control oof gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Pro a contro SS Communication setting 4 z z p cor setup iI ase EA Tine setting amp disolay a Project A a a Ca Prosrandata gontro teal Hard cop goz A Debug amp self cl fim Advanced Reoi g z S Touch ji tssis infor Alarm information a F ofw Program data control 2 z a Alarm information Alarm information Select drive A Built in SD card lt lt Q T K 0 0 o a SS oO 0 S m ve Ss lt x
334. tion Touch panel check function checks whether there are no dead zone area in 2 dots x 2 dots E Display operation of Touch panel check Main menu Debug amp self check gt 9 3 Utility Display x K elt chec ion setting Debug Self check P3 Time setting amp display Progran data contro al Debug Qgalf check WV Self check Touch Debug amp self check Touch panel check Check the area you touched turn ON If you want to abort press the top left corner touch switch T When you want to Notes on Touch panel check Self check It Memory check Display check ch panel check S Touch Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 14 12 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK 14 2 Self Check E Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of self check displays a black filled screen over the entire screen area Toucha part of the screen The touched part becomes a yellow filled display UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING Black filled screen OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 2 Touching the upper left part returns to the self check Upper left touch position CLOCK S
335. tion touch the Cancel button When touching the OK button in 2 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck Touching the OK button starts the restoration Touching the Cancel button cancels the restoration The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 71 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt Q z z Iv oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z Ss a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO 3 Operation to back up all data in the SRAM user area SRAM control Function name Setting ID Setting name Size Date Time pircvanced sys alarm 24 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 0 5KB 07 22 11 13 00 picvanced user alarm 1 25 0KB 475 0KB AE Backup restoration Drive 2 8MB 3 76B A Initialize z selected area Restoration Backup all area The SRAM data will be backed up to A It may take a few minutes before the process ends Do not turn off the GOT until the process is completed Do you want to execute backup Do you really want to execute The backup file already exists Created date 11 06 10 14 08 Do you want to overwrite the fi le To back up data in the SRAM user area to a drive Select the drive where the data is to be stored and then touch the Backup all area button The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To back
336. tion of a device with the same IP address as the GOT Therefore there is a possibility that the running GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users and the system control may be influenced by those errors Please change the setting of Behavior of duplicate IPs after carefully examining the necessity Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT configure the setting PortFast or others that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state The setting is required to make sure that the delay right after the connection by the spanning tree protocol does not occur Without the setting the Ethernet IP address duplication is not correctly detected Additionally the GOT may not be connected to Ethernet correctly For the setting that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state refer to the user s manual for the switching hub used 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 23 11 5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 7 0 z F o z O E S ld Wi a e ao Lu N E Q DISPLAY AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY CLOCK SETTINGS AND FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG AND SELF CHECK CLEANING DISPLAY
337. tions for backup data and backup settings and setting the maximum number of backup 11 18 S Ta z data 26 gt b Backuprestoration Setting the CPU No setting at backup to YES or NO 11 19 Zg oo Trigger backup settings 11 20 2 T g p Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network Behavior of duplicate IPs afterwards 11 21 11 1 Display Setting 2S Sa rnia Qa ngo 32 ao Le am eo Es ae CLOCK SETTINGS AND 11 1 1 Function of Display Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below When each item part is touched the respective setting becomes possible Z Item Description Setting range z amp o B4 Japanese oe 3 a2 English English M a z Confirmation of the current language and switching language PXH Chinese Simplified ee Language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by re Seas Chinese Traditional utility and dialog box a aol Korean Lo Deutsch German ia m At factory shipment User s selection 5 e z7 fies Opening screen time The title display period at the main unit boot can be set 0 10 60 Seconds a 2 rA At factory shipment 5 seconds m D w S r en savetime The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till 0 to 60 minutes G ag the screen save function starts can be set At factory shipment 5 seconds Whether turnin
338. to be installed in GOT in advance Thus oo this function cannot be used for the initial installation of standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT she Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods Sys 1 GT Designer3 Zt ora 2 Installing when starting the GOT 3 E Operation procedure Lu H 1 When installing with SD card Ew Power OFF the GOT After SD card access LEDis 3 off install the SD card in which BootOS standard toto Size Date Time monitor OS or project data is stored in the SD card 11 08 12 15 20 interface of GOT 11 08 12 15 20 za Switch ON the SD card access switch of GOT 226 B32 Display the program data control function E ae screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS lt 8 standard monitor OS from the SD card to GOT See BOOKB 3861584KB FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA 2 2 Q O The SD card access LED is lit during the install Now installing BootOS execution A Do not pull out the SD card or power off the GOT Sa while the SD card access LED is lit 5 9 we mod 926 5 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation 9 Ww T Reboot is completed 6 After confirming normal restart switch off the SD card access switch of the GOT Confirm that the card access LED is not lit and remove the SD card from the SD card interface of the GOT CLEANING DISPLAY ANANO ONIO LR ep SECTION CLEAN INSTALLATION OF 00 10 10 0 KORF ANN D 16
339. tor information to the GOT Touch the Add button era Administrator OPOO01 OP0002 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 2012 07 22 1001 10 1002 12 OPO003 1003 12 onl Operator information edit OperatorName CY Operator ID Level Password T Make a permanent password E Use ext auth ID tath D 7 Operator name input oPOOOg blazo _ AC DEL Operator ID input 1008 dee A E Operator level input ae ee ee a b c The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a OperatorName b OperatorID c Level d Password e Make a permanent password f Use ext auth ID g Ext auth ID Touch the OperatorName and then the Operator name input dialog box is displayed Input an operator name Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the OperatorID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed Input an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box is displayed Input an operator level When the input is completed touch the key When the level of the operator being login is changed during editing the operator informati
340. tputting directly below the drive Touching Exec button displays the dialog box shown left Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown at left appears without starting the conversion Touching OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 39 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x g z in oO le ina a a le ro ja os lt gt Jo pee a oao OFF WwW AI mkoko re S 13 40 4 Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted Advanced Recipe Information KindName Size nd DIRI GIP ARP0001 1K 1F i lel Create CSV TXT GIP 61P a m Create Folder Execute Target file ARPOOO1 G1P Are you sure do you want to delete Cannot delete Source file exist in folder Process completed 1 Touch and select the file folder to delete Touching Del button displays the dialog mentioned left Touching OK button deletes the file folder While executing Processing message appears on the screen Touching Cancel button cancels the deletion When it cannot be deleted t
341. tsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT Symbol This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products a Labeling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in 1 on the GOT or their packaging b Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC 17 6 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 4 Batte
342. ty 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 m Menu call key ee ee Pressing time Title display Please select keys 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the x Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen A lt gt Scroll one line column 2 44 gt Scroll window 9 8 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 6 H E Change of setting value O Operati z Operation Detail setting X gt MELSEC Fx z 5 Greni ssion Spee 2 o5 SES Eo LE N g Setting item Select button Setting item Select button E oar 25 gt 1 Setting item select button ae Touch the select button to change the settings zug The setting methods differ depending on the setting items aog The following types of setting method are available a Switch the setting value x3 Touch the button to switch the setting value as shown in ON OFF i 238 o lt b Enter the setting value with a keyboard Fae It is a key for inputting the numerical va
343. type touch panel does not require adjustment usually However misalignment between object position and actual touched position may be caused as usage time passes If misalignment between object position and actual touched position may occur adjust the touch panel position Misalignment between object position and actual touched position may operate an unintended object which causes unintended operation by mis output and mis operation 5 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 6 Set the terminating resistor selector switch of the GOT in accordance with the connection type when adopting GOT multidrop connection 7 Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment The protection is not applied when the interface environment protection cover is removed In addition the product may not be used in environments under exposition of oil or chemicals for a long period of time or in environments filled with oil mist 3 3 Power Supply Specifications Specifications Item GT1450 QLBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1455 QTBDE Input power supply voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple voltage 200mvV or less Fuse built in irreplaceable 1 6A Power consumption 7 68W 320mA 24V 8 40W 350mA 24V 7 68W 320mA 24V 8 40W 350mA 24V At backlight off 6 72W 280mA 24V 7 44W 310mA 24V 6 72W 280mA 24V 7 44W 310mA 24V Inrush current 30A or less 26 4VDC 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure
344. ue is selected VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blank Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusable reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Record Comment Record Comment is displayed File Name Path and name of recipe file are displayed 4 Setting No Recipe No is displayed Name Recipe name is displayed 5 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Advanced recipe information operation 1 Display operation of Advanced Recipe information f Touching a drive of Select drive displays the Adva anced Recipe Information information of the touched drive 2 Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder GIP RPO001 3 Touching a folder name of displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy 4 Touching a y button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen 5 Touching a file name selects the file 6 For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1P CSV G1P gt TXT 3 This section 2 CSV TXT GIP lt gt This section 3 Delete ciconia lt gt This section 4 COPY sissc
345. uration eessesseeesessenesseerrresrrrrssttrresrternsssrrenen 5 2 3 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product eeee 6 INSTALLATION Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 00 ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeetnaeeeeeeeeaas 6 1 6 1 6 2 Panel Cutting DIMENSION w 2 ccc2 cence ined ee A sannecees ageless anced ee vinngeeets Hale a a i 6 2 6 30 MOUNTING r OSION erna te deceit obi tans ep tedats dduovadiag untvaaana ies A a Ieee a a a aa 6 2 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 0 0 0 0 cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaas 6 3 6 5 Installation Proceduiferiw cchr cites atte ew titi dont nti a ed cee e a aes dee 6 4 7 WIRING El Power Supply Wing rinia ae a eet ea A E dco acted taped ate Pe dia 7 2 CAA Wirlng example a r r a cod aun cc dich a a a a sedate a a eaa 7 2 1 2 Grounding the GOT aii ariin riiintean aneia iaa aiie iaaa AA Na Eiai Eea 7 2 7 1 3 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy sssssseessssesrreseerrrssserrsssttrrrssrrrrrssrrenns 7 3 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel eeesesseeseerrenersrrnesrernnnartrnncsnttnneaarennddstenaananennacnttanannenneaannn 7 5 Teei AAT ISIO Er A ENEE ENEE O E 7 5 1 22 Outside the panelinde i e eaae Ted el a E 7 5 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment sesessseseenesesrrrsseerrsseerrsssttrrsssterrnssenrnssrrenns 7 6 8 OPTION Bal SSD
346. ure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT o Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction L Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the a o product E Not doing so can cause a fire or failure PO Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT 2 Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction g O W oO n WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range 4 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit 2 a lt at This chapter describes the wiring to the GOT power supply section For the connection with a PLC refer to the following L3 GOT1000 Series Connection
347. urrent value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS e When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If
348. wever be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure
349. with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file Touching Cancel button cancels moving When moving is completed completion dialog box is displayed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 59 13 2 Various Data Control lt lt x Q z in oO le iva a a le ro fa Z z Ss a pee a oao aS E wiz exe LOO 13 60 6 Rename operation An operation log file is changed 7 Touch and select the file to change the name _ogging Information KindNane Size O DIRI GIL LOGO0001_0001 b 60KB 3862528KB 2 Touching Rename button displays the screen shown left Input the file name to be changed By touching the following button input text type is changed l LINEA LOR A Z English capital A _ lt AC DEL a LIXICIVIBININ Enter 3 Touching Enter button displays the dialog box shown left Before LOG00001_0001 G1L After LINE A_LOG GIL 4 Touching OK button starts renaming file Change fi lename a i While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed Process completed Touching OK button closes the dialog 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Fold
350. y Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied 1 Select drive The A Built in SD card is not displayed when SD card is not installed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Copy Touching the button starts copying E GOT data package acquisition operation 4 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB memory This item explains using the A drive Oeae ee kager f Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts eol aye poles e are copied to the touched drive name ia installation iren the COT is SMSa Touching the Copy button starts copying turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in SD card Copy 2 The display depends on the status of copy Copy destination destination and setup Operate with following the displayed dialog box Because of the copy destination is Boot drive Project data and setup condition can t copy After execute disable setup please execute copy operation ok 3 After copying OS and data the dialog box for notifying the completion appears Touching the OK button closes the dialog box Copy is completed 13 90 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control z 8 Estimation of processing time 3 The time required for the pr
351. y v C Built in Flash Memory TaleaL lander 7 Mount the SD card to GOT For the SD card A l installation removal method refer to the following Kind Name Size Date Time G1 KYIPROJEGTI 29K 07 13 11 15 192 L7 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 2 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive J Touching Download button displays the screen Setup shown on the left Execute now Touching OK button executes the setup 4 When the setup is completed the dialog box Setup is completed mentioned left is displayed Restart now 3 Touching OK button restarts the GOT 13 24 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control 7 Upload setup cancel operation a Upload operation By upload operation the project data is transferred from the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Build in 5 SD card or E drive USB drive fe The SD card or USB memory after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT This item explains using the A drive E OTIN in p H Before upload operation Bs z The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive when the project data of the A drive is set up FE Execute setup cancel gt 7 b Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data sae TE 7 Touch A Built in SD card of Select drive A Up load g Do you want to upload 2 Touching Upload button displays the
352. ys the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Execution switch of each function 13 28 9 Number of files 1 2 Displays the total number of the displayed files Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the hardcopy information To display the updated creation date and time close the screen currently displayed by moving to the upper hierarchy folder etc and display the screen again Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following L gt 13 1 4 Display file 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 2 Various Data Control E Hardcopy information operation 1 Display operation of Hardcopy information Touching a drive of Select drive displays the information of the touched drive Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder Touching a folder of displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy Touching a Y button of the scrollbar scrolls up down the screen by one line Touching 4 button scrolls up down the screen by one screen Touching a file name selects the file For the operations of the delete copy and rename refer to the following Delet L

Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 Stereo Equalizer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents